97388 rev.12 machinery health manager

390
Reference Manual AMS Suite: Machinery Health Manager Software for Reliability—Based Maintenance ® Part # 97388 Rev. 12

Upload: demostenes69

Post on 14-Apr-2015

600 views

Category:

Documents


26 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Reference Manual

AMS™ Suite: Machinery Health™

ManagerSoftware for Reliability—Based Maintenance®

Part # 97388 Rev. 12

Page 2: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Copyright© 2007 by Emerson Process Management.All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, trans-mitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form by any means without the written permission of Emerson Process Management.

DisclaimerThis manual is provided for informational purposes. EMERSON PROCESS MANAGEMENT MAKES NO WAR-RANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WAR-RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PAR-TICULAR PURPOSE. Emerson Process Management shall not be liable for errors, omissions, or inconsistencies that may be contained herein or for incidental or con-sequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Emerson Pro-cess Management. The information in this manual is not all-inclusive and cannot cover all unique situations.

Product SupportShould you have any comments on this documentation or questions concerning the Agreement on the fol-lowing pages, please contact Emerson Process Manage-ment’s Product Support Department.

Addresses:

The Americas and CanadaEmerson Process Management835 Innovation DriveKnoxville, TN 37932 USAPhone: 865-675-4274FAX: [email protected]

Europe and Middle EastEmerson Process ManagementResearch Park Inerleuvenlaan 50 Leuven 3001

BelgiumPhone: 32/16/74/.14.71

UK 441516779418FAX: 32/16/[email protected]

Asia PacificEmerson Process Management Asia Pacific Pte Ltd1 Pandan CrescentSingapore 128461Phone: 65.67708706FAX: [email protected]

Worldwide Web:

http://www.MHM.AssetWeb.com

AMS Machinery Manager Reference ManualThis document was written, illustrated, and produced by Emerson Process Management’s Engineering Publi-cations Group on PC’s using Adobe™ FrameMaker®, Adobe PhotoShop®, and Macromedia® FreeHand™.

Trademarks and ServicemarksEmerson Process Management logo; Infranalysis; Infra-Route; MachineView; MotorView; Nspectr; OilView (Japan); AMS Machinery Manager; Reliability-Based Maintenance, and logo; are registered trademarks of Emerson Process Management.

PeakVue; RBMview; AMS Machinery Manager (Aus-tralia, China, Japan); RBMwizard; Reliability-Based Maintenance (Venezuela); SonicScan; SST; VibPro; and VibView are pending trademarks of Emerson Process Management.

Lubricant Profile and Trivector are registered service-marks of Emerson Process Management.

RBM; AMS Machinery Manager (China); Reliability-Based Maintenance (Venezuela); and design are pending servicemarks of Emerson Process Manage-ment.

Adobe is a trademark and FrameMaker and PhotoShop are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Inc. Power Macintosh is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. Mac-romedia is a registered trademark and FreeHand is a trademark of Macromedia, Inc. Xerox and DocuTech are trademarks of Xerox Corporation.

All other brand or product names are trademarks or reg-istered trademarks of their respective companies.

ii

Page 3: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

PatentsThe product(s) described in this manual are covered under existing and pending patents.

License AgreementIMPORTANT: CAREFULLY READ ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT BEFORE OPENING THE PACKAGE OR PROCEEDING WITH INSTALLATION. OPENING THE PACKAGE OR COM-PLETING THE INSTALLATION INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT.

IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS AND CON-DITIONS CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT, CANCEL ANY INSTALLATION AND PROMPTLY RETURN THIS PRODUCT AND THE ASSOCIATED DOCUMENTATION TO Emerson, AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED. NO REFUNDS WILL BE GIVEN FOR PRODUCTS WITH DAMAGED OR MISSING COMPONENTS.

Definition of SoftwareAs used herein, “software” refers to any computer pro-gram contained on any medium. Software includes downloadable firmware for use in devices such as ana-lyzers or MotorStatus units and it includes computer programs executable on computers or computer net-works.

Software LicenseYou have the non-exclusive right to use this software on only one device at a time. You may back-up the soft-ware for archival purposes. For network systems, you have the non-exclusive right to install this software on only one server. Read/write access is limited to the number of concurrent use licenses purchased. The num-ber of guest-only accesses is up to a maximum of 250.

Emerson grants you a non-exclusive right to use the Software solely for your own internal data processing operations on the Emerson designated supported operat-ing platform for up to any applicable maximum number of licensed users. You may not relicense the Software or use the Software for third party training, commercial

time sharing, rental, or service bureau use. Client may not use the Software in, as, or with an ASP (Application Service Provider).

Software UpdatesEmerson agrees to provide you, at no charge except for media, preparation and shipping charges, for one (1) year from the date of purchase, all updates to the soft-ware made at the sole discretion of Emerson. Should you purchase a software support agreement for the next succeeding year following the first year from the date of purchase, and thereafter on an annual basis, and if Emerson is still providing support, you may purchase the same, annually, at the then existing rate..

Updates/UpgradesUpon receipt of new Emerson software replacing older Emerson software, you have 30 days to install and test the new Emerson software on the same or a different device. At the end of the 30-day test period, you must both remove and return the new Emerson software or remove the older Emerson software.

OwnershipThe licensed software and all derivatives are the sole property of Computational Systems, Inc. You may not disassemble, decompile, reverse engineer or otherwise translate the licensed program. You may not distribute copies of the program or documentation, in whole or in part, to another party. You may not in any way distort, or otherwise modify the program or any part of the doc-umentation without prior written consent from Emerson.

TransferYou may transfer the software and license to another party only with the written consent of Emerson and only if the other party agrees to accept the terms and condi-tions of this Agreement. If you transfer the program, you must transfer the documentation and any backup copies or transfer only the documentation and destroy any backup copies.

CopyrightThe software and documentation are copyrighted. All rights are reserved.

iii

Page 4: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

TerminationIf you commit a material breach of this Agreement, Emerson may terminate the Agreement by written notice.

Virus DisclaimerEmerson uses the latest virus checking technologies to test all its software. However, since no antivirus system is 100% reliable, we strongly advise that you use an anti-virus system in which you have confidence to verify the software is virus-free. Emerson makes no representa-tions or warranties to the effect that the licensed soft-ware is virus-free.

NO WARRANTYTHE PROGRAM IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" WITHOUT ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OR MERCHANTABILITY

OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND REMEDIESIN NO EVENT WILL EMERSON BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY DAMAGES,

INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE THIS PROGRAM.

THE LICENSEE'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY IN THE EVENT OF A DEFECT

IN WORKMANSHIP OR MATERIAL IS EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE REPLACEMENT OF THE DISKETTES OR OTHER MEDIA. IN NO EVENT WILL EMERSON'S LIABILITY EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT.

Export RestrictionsYou agree to comply fully with all laws, regulations, decrees and orders of the Unites States of America that restrict or prohibit the exportation (or re-exportation) of technical data and/or the direct product of it to other countries, including, without limitation, the U.S. Export Administration Regulations.

U.S. Government RightsWhen provided to the U.S. government, the computer software and related materials and documentation are provided subject to the same license rights as those enu-merated above.

Hardware Technical Help1. Please have the number of the current version of

your firmware ready when you call. The version of the firmware in Emerson Process Management’s CSI 2100 series, and other analyzers appears on the power-up screen that is displayed when the analyzer is turned on.

2. If you have a problem, explain the exact nature of your problem. For example, what are the error messages? When do they occur? Know what you were doing when the problem occurred. For example, what mode were you in? What steps did you go through? Try to determine before you call whether the problem is repeatable.

Hardware Repair Emerson Process Management repairs and updates its hardware products free for one year from the date of purchase. This service warranty includes hardware improvement, modification, correction, recalibration, update, and maintenance for normal wear. This service warranty excludes repair of damage from misuse, abuse, neglect, carelessness, or modification performed by anyone other than Emerson Process Management.

After the one year service warranty expires, each return of a Emerson Process Management hardware product is subject to a minimum service fee. If the cost of repair exceeds this minimum fee, we will call you with an esti-mate before performing any work. Contact Emerson Process Management’s Product Support Department for information concerning the current rates.

Obsolete HardwareAlthough Emerson Process Management will honor all contractual agreements and will make every effort to ensure that its software packages are “backward com-patible,” to take advantage of advances in newer hard-ware platforms and to keep our programs reasonably small, Emerson Process Management reserves the right to discontinue support for old or out-of-date hardware items.

iv

Page 5: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Software Technical Help1. Please have the number of the current version of

your software ready when you call. The version number for software operating under Windows® is displayed by selecting “About” under the Help menu bar item.

2. If you have a problem, explain the exact nature of your problem. For example, what are the error messages? (If possible, make a printout of the error message.) When do they occur? Know what you were doing when the problem occurred. For example, what mode were you in? What steps did you go through? Try to determine before you call whether the problem is repeatable.

3. Please be at your computer when you call. We can serve you better when we can work through the problem together.

Software Technical SupportEmerson Process Management provides technical sup-port through the following for those under support agreement:

• Telephone assistance and communication via the Internet.

• Mass updates that are released during that time.

• Interim updates upon request. Please contact Emerson Process Management Product Support for more information.

Returning Items1. Call Product Support (see page 2) to obtain a return

authorization number. Please write it clearly and prominently on the outside of the shipping container.

2. If returning for credit, return all accessories originally shipped with the item(s). Include cables, software diskettes, manuals, etc.

3. Enclose a note that describes the reason(s) you are returning the item(s).

4. Insure your package for return shipment. Shipping costs and any losses during shipment are your responsibility. COD packages cannot be accepted and will be returned unopened.

v

Page 6: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

vi

Page 7: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Contents

Chapter 1 • Read This First

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1New Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Functional Organization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Special Emphasis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6User Manual Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Contents of this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Optional AMS Machinery Manager Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Operating Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

AMS Machinery Manager Client/Server Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Single User and Network Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

AMS Machinery Manager System Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Database Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Network Administration Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20AMS Machinery Manager Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Equipment Configuration Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21RBMview Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Framework Knowledge Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Component Warehouses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Application Specific Reference Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22HTML Help Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Chapter 2 • Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

The AMS Machinery Manager Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Measurement Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Database Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Analysis Parameter Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Alarm Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Alarm Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Page 8: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Baseline Override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Absolute Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Absolute Delta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Alarm Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Alarm Codes in EXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Alarm Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Color Scheme Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17User Interaction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Fault Frequencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

AMS Machinery Manager Main Menu Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29File Menu Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29Tools Menu Right-Mouse Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39Shortcut Bar Right-Mouse Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40View Menu Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43Help Menu Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Chapter 3 • Database Setup/Management – DBASE

DBASE Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1File Menu Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Edit Menu Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16View Menu Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Hierarchy Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Tools Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Help Menu Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Main Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Tree Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Periodic Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Modify Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43Analysis Parameter/Data Acquisition (Periodic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49Analysis Parameter Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59Alarm Limit/Data Evaluation (Periodic). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64Fault Frequency Set Information (Periodic). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70Notepad Observations (Periodic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82Database Global Information (Periodic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83

Notes, Examples, and Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87Alarm Limit Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87Fault Frequency Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89

viii

Page 9: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Detail Mode Fault Frequency Set Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89Outputs of Fault Frequencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97When and How to Use the Fixed Tach Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98

Oil Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-100Analysis Parameter/Data Acquisition (Oil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-117Alarm Limit/Data Evaluation (Oil). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-124Fault Frequency Set Information (Oil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-127Notepad Observations (Oil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-127Database Global Information (Oil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-127

Thermography Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-128Analysis Parameter/Data Acquisition (Thermography). . . . . . . . . . . . .3-133Alarm Limit/Data Evaluation (Thermography). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-134Fault Frequency Set Information (Thermography). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-134Notepad Observations (Thermography) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-134Database Global Information (Thermography). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-135

Motor Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-136Analysis Parameter/Data Acquisition (Motor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-138Alarm Limit/Data Evaluation (Motor). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-138Fault Frequency Set Information (Motor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-138Notepad Observations (Motor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-138Database Global Information (Motor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-138

Ultrasonic Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-139Analysis Parameter/Data Acquisition (Ultrasonic). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-144Alarm Limit/Data Evaluation (Ultrasonic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-144Fault Frequency Set Information (Ultrasonic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-144Notepad Observations (Ultrasonic). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-144Database Global Information (Ultrasonic). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-144

Chapter 4 • Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Data Management Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Show Routes on Tree/Show MeasPnt on Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Show Job Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Print (Database) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Print (Area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8Print (Equipment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Print (Measurement Point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

ix

Page 10: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Delete (Database) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16Delete (Area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19Delete (Equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21Delete (Measurement Point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25AsgnOfR-Spec. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26AsgnOfR-Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Data Statistics Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27Overview of Function Bar Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28Clear Basline (Database) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30Clear Baslin (Area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32Clear Baslin (Equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34Clr Ave/Sigm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35Clr All Stat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35Set Basl = Ave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35Calc New Stat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35Manual Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Data Label Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39Tree by Routes/Tree by Measurement Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39Change Label (Database) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40Change Label (Area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41Change Label (Equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41Change Label (Measurement Point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42Spctrl Data/Wavfrm Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43Reset Ref . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Chapter 5 • Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

DBUtly Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2DBUtly Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Other DBUtly Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Copy/Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Database Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Copy vs. Cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Copying Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Moving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Source and Target Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19Copy/Move Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

x

Page 11: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Modify Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Database Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Filter/Actions Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Modify Equipment Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Modify Measurement Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33Database Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33Filter/Actions Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34Modify Measurement Points Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Chapter 6 • Manual Data Entry - MANLOG

Chapter 7 • Route Management- ROUTE

Route Limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Creating A New Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Route Definition Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Collection Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Technology Flags Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Selecting Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Auto-Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Rename Old Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

Editing and Deleting Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Edit An Existing Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Delete An Old Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

Modify Route Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

Print A Route Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

Reorder Route List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24

Define Multiple Route Load (MRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25Using Data Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27Using MRL with the Machinery Analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

Chapter 8 • Previewer

Working with Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Setting Up the Previewer Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

xi

Page 12: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Working with Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Formatting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Creating Connections with Other Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Appendix A • DBZIP / AUTOZIP

Using DBZIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2Regular User. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3Power User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9

Using AutoZip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17Creating Archives from the command line using AutoZip . . . . . . . . . . . A-17

xii

Page 13: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Chapter 1

Read This First

Introduction

AMS Machinery Manager is a multi-technology data analysis software package designed for Machinery Health Management programs. AMS Machinery Man-ager supports CSI Machinery Health Analyzers, online condition monitoring sys-tems, oil analysis and other machinery health data collection devices.

AMS Machinery Manager consists of an integrated set of 32-bit MS-Windows based software programs.

AMS Machinery Manager features and functions include:

• Supports CSI 2117, 2120, 2130 and 8000-series portable analyzers.

• Supports shared access to multiple AMS Machinery Manager databases via robust client-server architecture.

• Integrates vibration, tribology, thermography, ultrasonic, and motor mea-surement and analysis technologies.

• Features automated AMS Machinery Manager database set-up.

• Provides extensive integrated status and reporting capabilities.

NoteTo install software and prepare to use AMS Machinery Manager, refer to the AMS Machinery Manager Installation and Administration Manual.

1-1

Page 14: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

New Features

• Diagnostic Analysis Plotting Module

• Automated Harmonic Peak Location• Improved Cascade Plotting• Autocorrelation of waveform• Circular Waveform Data Plots• Enhanced Hot Key Navigation• Update spectrum/waveform via trend plot• Double-click on plot for “New Window” launch• Graphic Save Link to RBMview• Destroy/Restore Peak

• Data Lockers

• Autozip/DBzip

• Dbutly now supports moving of transient archive files

• Permissions Administration

• Support of an External Hard Drive for a Transient 4500 Unit

• Browser-based Case History Viewer

• USB Security Key Support

• New Data Transfer Module

• Key Phase Display on Orbit Plots

• Color Coded Indications of Speed Change on Bode/Nyquist Plots

Thermography Software• Infrared route communication with 9800XL Machinery Health Thermal Imager

• Upload Image Analysis and Fault Event documentation along with Thermal and Visible Light images

• Drag and Drop file handling for Off-Route images

• 12bit image analysis with range/span and emmisivity adjustment, plus unlimited spot temperature cursors

1-2 Read This First

Page 15: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

• Long filename support for image files • Quick Print summary report

2120 & 2130• Includes JOBS from 2120 and 2130 for transient, off route and two-channel

analysis

• 2130 Print capability

• Diagnostic Analysis support for portables

• Support for alignment with CSI 2130

Oilview• Updated to support the new Vicon model VIC511 scale

• Improved report language translations

• Updated Lab data import

Transient• Enhancements include:

• Waveform Runout Subtraction, (.NET enhanced)

• Transient Archive Replay

• Multiple Extraction Servers

AMS Machinery Manager• Infrastructure improvements

• CSIcom/RBMcom replaced in new .NET platform

Online Features

• External Hard Drive support

• Make the O_Watch screen refresh/update rate configurable.

• In the O_Watch measurement point display, auto-select the appropriate DCS in the display on the right.

• Modify the O_Watch tree view so that system alarms are not displayed as part of the tree status by default.

• Modifications to the Trip Predicate configuration to allow two-sensor voting.

1-3

Page 16: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

• Modifications to allow configuration of the sensor voltage range for DC pro-cess sensors.

• Ability to activate/deactivate multiple data collection sets (DCS’s)

• Ability to enable/disable, change and verify the Gross Scan data reporting interval for multiple measurement points.

• Enable/disable, change and verify the AP trend and block data reporting interval on multiple DCS’s.

• Spread sheet view of configuration settings for fast edits and verification of settings.

• Allow edits to existing Analysis Parameter and Alarm Limit sets that are asso-ciated with a DCS when editing a.cvb database template.

• Live tachometer signal viewer tool, similar to an oscilloscope, for channel commissioning.

• Report documents every condition that closes an output digital relay from a channel perspective as well as from the perspective of area, machine, and measurement point.

• Improve the Phase Alert limit handling.

• Fully implement the ability to report speed as a feet per minute (FPM).

1-4 Read This First

Page 17: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Operating Systems supported:Servers

• Windows 2000 server SP4

• Windows 2003 server R2 w/ Terminal Server

Client

• Windows 2000 Professional SP4

• Windows XP Professional SP2

1-5

Page 18: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Functional Organization

The functions of AMS Machinery Manager fall into three general categories:

• Setup/Communications - RBM database management and data collection tools

• Analysis - Data plotting, automatic analysis, statistical alarms, and specific technology packages such as OilView, MotorView, SonicView, and Infrared Analyzers.

• Documentation and Reporting - Powerful tracking and reporting tools for RBM program management

All of the individual program modules are accessible from the AMS Machinery Manager Main Menu.

For information on the program modules, see “Contents of this Manual” on page 1-8.

Special Emphasis

These conventions are used throughout this manual to call attention to the adja-cent text:

NoteA note indicates special comments or instructions.

Caution!A caution indicates actions that may have a major impact on the software, database files, etc.

Warning!Warnings indicate activities that may endanger your health or safety, or that could damage equipment.

1-6 Read This First

Page 19: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

User Manual Prerequisites

The AMS Machinery Manager manuals are written with the assumption that you are familiar with the basic operation of the host computer and Microsoft Win-dows®, Windows 2000, or Windows XP commands.

If you are unfamiliar with the computer, peripheral hardware, or Microsoft Win-dows conventions, Emerson strongly recommends review of the appropriate docu-mentation before using the AMS Machinery Manager software.

1-7

Page 20: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Contents of this Manual

Chapter 1 IntroductionIn addition to an introduction and a list of AMS Machinery Manager’s hardware and software requirements, the Introduction describes the contents of this manual, and presents and overview of the AMS Machinery Manager architecture.

Chapter 2 Overview of AMS Machinery ManagerProvides a general overview and describes the various components, databases, and terms that make up AMS Machinery Manager.

Chapter 3 Database Setup/Management – DBASEThe Database Setup/Management program (DBASE) is used to establish and maintain a comprehensive database that contains the information necessary to col-lect, organize, analyze, and store RBM data on many different machines at one or more plant sites.

DBASE uses indexing methods to uniquely identify every data set collected for each measurement point defined for a machine. Analysis parameter sets and alarm/alert levels typify the conventions that DBASE uses to establish data collec-tion and analysis techniques. These techniques assist you in detecting irregular machine operation.

Chapter 4 Stored Data Management - DATMGRThe Stored Data Management program (DATMGR) performs basic utility func-tions for the management of AMS Machinery Manager databases. You may use it to delete trend, spectral, and waveform data sets, print summaries of all stored data sets, modify spectral and waveform data set labels, and reset trend data statistics. DATMGR can also be used to transfer “off-route” data to measurement points that are defined in the database.

Chapter 5 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLYThe Database Utility Functions program (DBUTLY) provides functions designed to extract, merge and modify database information. The Copy/Move functions enable you to copy and move information from a source database to a target data-base. The Modify functions enable you to modify machine or measurement point definitions within the database.

1-8 Read This First

Page 21: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Chapter 6 Manual Data Entry – MANLOGThe Manual Data Logging program (MANLOG) allows trend data to be entered manually into the AMS Machinery Manager database. In addition, the trend data may be revised where it resides, or it may be specifically inserted into an appropriate location.

Chapter 7 Route Management - ROUTEThe Route Management program (ROUTE) is used to create and manage a list of equipment and measurement points arranged to provide an efficient path (route) for the operator to follow when collecting data. The route also instructs the machinery analyzer how to collect and store data. The ROUTE program can also be used to group similar equipment for:

Analysis with Diagnostic Plotting (PLOTDATA) or Automated fault Diag-nostics (NSpectr)

Reporting with Exceptions Reporting (EXPORT)

Global data management with Database Utility Functions (DBUTLY)

Chapter 8 Previewer - CSIviewThe Previewer program (CSIview) is an easy-to-use word processor available from the main AMS Machinery Manager menu. CSIview allows you to create custom reports and other documents, and it imports many standard file and graphics for-mats. CSIview is a convenient tool to display and print information generated by RBMview applications.

1-9Contents of this Manual

Page 22: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Optional AMS Machinery Manager Applications

The following are optional Emerson products that can be used with AMS Machinery Manager. Although mentioned throughout this manual, full descrip-tions of functions for these products are provided in their associated user’s man-uals.

Nspectr Automated Fault AnalysisNspectr is a knowledge-based program designed to automatically diagnose mechanical machinery problems. Nspectr makes it easier for analysts to make speedy and accurate diagnoses of your equipment problems by providing diagnos-tics and recommended actions.

Autostat Statistical Alarm SetupAutostat creates external envelopes and alarm limit levels by performing a statistical analysis on data in the AMS Machinery Manager database. Machines which are similar in design and exhibit similar characteristics in their vibration signatures can be grouped together so that their spectral data can be used to statistically construct these envelope limits and alarm limit sets.

Infrared AnalysisInfrard Analysis provides hardware and software to set up and maintain a compre-hensive thermography program. It lets you identify the equipment to be scanned, the monitoring schedule, specific temperature limits, and other information needed to construct a database that defines the monitoring procedures for your program. Infrared Analysis supports generating and downloading routes, and retrieving and documenting images captured with the VDC. The software lets you generate reports in different formats, as well as perform analysis using the annota-tions feature.

MotorViewTM

MotorView is the optional Induction Motor Analysis program that analyzes the fre-quency spectra of a motor’s electrical supply current to detect rotor-related elec-trical faults. These include broken rotor bars, high-resistance joints, voids in aluminum cast rotors, and cracked rotor end rings in squirrel-cage induction motors.

1-10 Read This First

Page 23: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

An extended version of the program, MotorView II, is used to detect additional electrical problems such as faults in rotors and stators, as well as voltage imbalance. The analyses performed and recommendations provided are based on measure-ments acquired with flux, current, and temperature sensors.

OilView®

OilView is a multi-functional predictive maintenance tool for immediate, on-site evaluation of in-service lubricating fluids. The OilView software is used in conjunc-tion with an oil laboratory, a minilab, or both. OilView is available in three configu-rations:

The Trivector Laboratory Data Import and Viewer configuration allows the user to automatically access the CSI Trivector lab via modem, upload data, and view the data in tabular and graphical reports.

The Laboratory Data Edit/Entry and Import configuration supports importing data from CSI’s lab and from other leading industrial oil analysis labs as well. It is fully integrated with AMS Machinery Manager, and allows you to add, edit, or perform further analysis on the data.

The Wear Debris Analysis configuration performs detailed wear debris analysis (WDA), and captures and stores images acquired with the OilView Shop Microscope and other instruments.

Ultrasonic Data ManagerThe Ultrasonic Data Manager application performs two functions: communicate routes and data between AMS Machinery Manager and the ultrasonic data col-lector, and to report on the data. Ultrasonic Data Manager generates general and application-specific reports on the data. Different applications may be defined in the software such as leaks, steam traps, mechanical defects, valves, etc.

Vibration AnalysisThe Vibration Analysis tab enables you to track, display, analyze and report dual-channel, cross-channel, and transient data collected with the CSI Model 2120-2 Machinery Analyzer equipped with special purpose programs: Advanced Two-Channel and Advanced Transient.

The Advanced Two-Channel program allows for dual and cross-channel data to be acquired and stored. The Advanced Transient program allows you to acquire time waveform data for machinery with long cycle times or for machinery that runs intermittently. This data may then be post-processed in Vibration Analysis.

1-11Optional AMS Machinery Manager Applications

Page 24: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

UltraManager Corrective PackagesUltraManager consists of Alignment, Analyze, Balance, Motor, and QC software packages to fit a variety of applications used in implementing corrective action.

RBMwizard™RBMwizard is designed to assist you in building a Reliability Based Maintenance (RBM) database quickly by automating many of the steps in the process. RBM-wizard operates by leading you through typical Equipment choices and then cre-ating the necessary database and configuration files based on your input. RBMwizard is intended to complement the capabilities of AMS Machinery Man-ager’s traditional tools: Database Setup (DBASE), Stored Database Manager (DATMGR), and Database Utility Functions (DBUTLY).

RBMviewRBMview for AMS Machinery Manager is a tool which a provides high-level over-view of a your entire plant Machinery Health Manager program. RBMview is designed to provide efficient processing of information to achieve the following goals:

• Provide a central location for current and historical Machinery Health information about equipment.

• Provide a means to track and monitor Machinery Health events such as alarms and problems.

• Establish a magnitude or rank of significance of information and events relating to equipment.

• Present a high level view of the current status of equipment while allowing you to “drill down” or navigate to specific records.

• Provide a means to generate and track work orders, reports, and graphs related to equipment.

• Enable integration of information directly from Emerson’s AMS Machinery Manager and also from other vendors’ databases via external information/enterprise interfaces such as Machinery Information Management Open Systems Alliance (MIMOSA) tools and functions.

With many new features and functions, RBMview is the successor to the Master-Trend Case Histories Compilation (COMPIL) and the Automated Report Gener-ation (REPORT) modules.

1-12 Read This First

Page 25: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Operating Requirements

This section lists the data collection devices and systems supported by AMS Machinery Manager and the minimum hardware and software required to install and run AMS Machinery Manager.

Supported Data Collection DevicesAMS Machinery Manager supports the following data collection devices and sys-tems:

• CSI 2115, 2117, 2120, Machinery Analyzers

• UltraSpec 8000-series Analyzers

• SonicScan 7000-series

• InfraRoute 9000-series Data Collection devices and systems

• MotorView Flux Coil, AC Current Clamp, Temperature Sensors, and Shaft Probe

• OilView 5000-series Tribology MiniLab Products

NoteContact Emerson Customer Support for information about AMS Machinery Manager support for additional CSI or third-party data collection devices.

1-13Operating Requirements

Page 26: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Single User WorkStation RequirementsThese are the requirements for a single-user system running AMS Machinery Man-ager:

WorkstationsMinimum Requirements

Operating Systems Windows 2000 SP4 or greater, Windows XP Professional w/SP2

Processor Speed 1.5 GHz, 512 (MB) of RAM

Network Ethernet (TCP/IP protocol)

Browser Internet Explorer 5.5 or later

Screen Resolution XGA (1024x768)

Other RS232 serial communications port (9-pin)*, USB 1.1 port**

Recommended Requirements

Operating System Windows 2000 SP4 or greater, Windows XP Professional with SP2

Processor Speed 2.0 GHz Dual Core, 1 GB of RAM

Network Ethernet (TCP/IP protocol)

Browser Internet Explorer 6 or later

Screen Resolution SXGA (1280x1024), WSXGA (1680x1050)

Other RS232 serial communications port (9-pin)*, USB 2.0 port.

*For communications with analyzers prior to the CSI 2130, a PC must have an RS232 Serial Port. A USB port is highly recommended for communications with the CSI 2130 analyzer. The CSI 2130 requires AMS Machinery Manager 4.80 or higher. The CSI 4500 does not require an RS232 serial port or a USB port.**For communication with the WDA Image Capture Kit, a USB 2.0 port is required.

Recommended Requirements for Online Live Transient Client

Operating System Windows 2000 SP4 or greater, Windows XP Professional w/ SP2

Processor Speed 2.33 GHz Dual Core, 2 (GB) of RAM

Video Card Direct X 9.0b compatible

1-14 Read This First

Page 27: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteAMS Suite™: Machinery Health™ Manager assumes all the resources are available during operation. If part of your system is used for other software packages, conflicts may occur. Contact Emerson Customer Support if you experience conflicts.

Network Ethernet (TCP/IP protocol)

Browser Internet Explorer 6 or later

Screen Resolution SXGA (1280x1024), WSXGA (1680x1050)

Other RS232 serial communications port (9-pin), USB 2.0 port*

ServersMinimum Requirements

Operating Systems

LAN Windows 2000 Server SP4 , Windows Server 2003, Release 2 (R2)

WAN Windows 2000 Terminal Server SP4, Windows 2003 Terminal Server, SP1 or Windows Server 2003 Release 2 (R2 - w/ Terminal Server)

Processor Speed Portable Systems: 1.83 GHz dual core, 1 (GB) of RAM

Online Systems: server class 2.33 GHz dual core, 1 gigabyte (GB) of RAM

Network Ethernet Adapter (TCP/IP protocol)

Recommended Requirements

Operating Systems

LAN Windows 2000 SP4 or greater, Windows Server 2003, Release 2 (R2)

WAN Windows 2000 Terminal Server SP4, Windows 2003 Terminal Server (SP1), or Windows Server 2003 Release 2 (R2) (with Terminal Server)

1-15Operating Requirements

Page 28: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Processor Speed Portable Systems: 2.33 GHz dual core, 2 (GB) of RAM

Online Systems: Server class 3.0 GHz dual core,

2 (GB) of RAM

Network Ethernet Adapter (TCP/IP protocol)

Recommended, Single-unit CSI 4500 and CSI XP32 Systems

Operating System Windows 2000 SP4 or greater, Windows XP Professional SP2

Processor Speed 2.33 GHz dual core, 2 (GB) of RAM

Video Card Direct X 9.0b compatible

Network Ethernet (TCP/IP Protocol)

Browser Internet Explorer 6.0 or greater

Screen Resolution SXGA (1280x1024), WSXGA (1680x1050)

1-16 Read This First

Page 29: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

AMS Machinery Manager Client/Server Architecture

Depending on your AMS Machinery Manager license, the software can be oper-ated as a single-user application on a single computer, or as a networked application distributed across a Local Area network (LAN) or Wide area Network (WAN).

Single User and Network Configurations

AMS Machinery Manager Network Architecture

1-17AMS Machinery Manager Client/Server Architecture

Page 30: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Single-user LicenseWith a single-user license, the Database Server resides on your local hard drive and operates in the background when you are running AMS Machinery Manager. When you launch AMS Machinery Manager, the Database Server is also launched. When AMS Machinery Manager is shut down, the Database Server is also shut down. With a Single-user License, two users cannot access the same database simul-taneously. However, two users can access the same Database at different times.

Network LicenseWith a Network License, the Database Server may be installed on any Win32 net-work server. It is recommended that there be multiple Database Servers in a WAN environment, one per LAN. The TCP/IP network protocol must be running on both the client and the server computers.

1-18 Read This First

Page 31: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

AMS Machinery Manager System Architecture

AMS Machinery Manager uses a client/server architecture. Each AMS Machinery Manager application acts as a client communicating through servers to the various databases via the TCP/IP communications protocol. The location of the Servers depends on whether you have a Single User or Network license.

AMS Machinery Manager manages many programs and reads and writes many dif-ferent kinds of data to several databases. Though all of this activity runs in the back-ground while you work, it is helpful to understand the AMS Machinery Manager system architecture. The following sections describe the major components and their functions.

1

1-19AMS Machinery Manager System Architecture

Page 32: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Database Server

The Database Server manages access to all AMS Machinery Manager Databases. If you have a Single-user License, the Database Server runs locally on your hard drive. If you have a Network License, the Database Server may run on another computer on your network.

The Database server is a multi-threaded, client-server application that runs on any Win32 platform. It requires the TCP/IP network protocol.

There is a limit of 250 simultaneous connections to the Database Server. This means that, at a given time, one user could have 250 connections or 250 different users could each have one connection to the Database Server. Each Database Server has a default database directory. This default directory may be configured using the RBMadmin application. Emerson strongly recommends that users place all AMS Machinery Manager databases that are managed by a given server in this default database directory.

The Database Server also has a system data directory in which its log files and con-figuration files are written.

Network Administration Server

The Network Administration Server performs several functions associated with the AMS Machinery Manager license. Functions of the Network Administration Server include monitoring the number of users; reporting on which programs are run by which users; defining the type of access, if any, the users have to programs; enforcing the limit on the number of users that may be logged on; and ensuring that the number of users who are simultaneously accessing a given resource is within the boundaries of the license.

There must be one and only one Network Administration Server that administers a license to AMS Machinery Manager. For performance reasons, Emerson recom-mends that a separate network license be purchased per Local Area Network instead of trying to use a single license across an entire Wide Area Network.

1-20 Read This First

Page 33: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

AMS Machinery Manager Database

The AMS Machinery Manager database is organized around Areas (logical groups of Equipment) and Equipment (machines and other assets). See “Overview of AMS Machinery Manager” on page 2-1 for more information. An AMS Machinery Manager database provides storage for measurement point, trend, spectral, wave-form, and notepad data plus image files from infrared and ultrasonic technologies. Also contained within the database are Analysis Parameter Sets, Alarm Limit Sets, and Fault Frequency Sets which provide information concerning the collection, analysis, display, and storage of the acquired data.

Equipment Configuration Database

This database serves two main purposes. First it serves as a “project” file while you are building up Equipment Configurations with Emerson’s automated database builder, RBMwizard. When you use RBMwizard to build a AMS Machinery Man-ager Database, RBMwizard uses the information stored in this Project file to “fill in” or build the AMS Machinery Manager Database. Second, it serves as a reference for the Nspectr Automated Fault Analysis program. Nspectr looks at Equipment Con-figuration data stored in this databases while performing fault analysis. This file uses the filename extension .dbz.

RBMview Database

The RBMview Database is created in addition to AMS Machinery Manager data-bases. This RBMview Database is designed to be a central repository for informa-tion about your RBM program. Emerson recommends having one .mdb file for each .RBM file. You can import data into RBMview from AMS Machinery Manager or other external information/enterprise databases.

Information typically enters RBMview from AMS Machinery Manager applications (or other similar sources) such as Exception Analysis (EXPORT) or Automated Diagnostic Analysis (Nspectr) which report Alarm and/or Problem “Events.”

1-21AMS Machinery Manager System Architecture

Page 34: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Framework Knowledge Database

RBMview, Nspectr Automated Fault Analysis, and other AMS Machinery Manager programs employ a special knowledge database (DBLookup.mdb) to store pre-defined descriptions for Faults, Observations, Actions, and Root Causes.

The list of descriptions is comprehensive and covers many common events. For example, predefined Faults include Vibration/Periodic “Antifriction bearing looseness” or Oil “Large particles present.” Examples of predefined Actions include Corrective “Collect torsional data” or Motor “Check for phase balance.” To ensure a common framework, this Knowledge Database is shared by both RBM-view and by other AMS Machinery Manager applications. Thus the codes for Faults, Observations, and Actions are also used by Nspectr, OilView, MotorView, etc.

Component Warehouses

Supplied with AMS Machinery Manager are read only libraries of existing compo-nents such as electric motors. The items in the CSI Warehouse are stored in the CSI_cmp.wh database file. Components from the CSI library are pre-configured with known information such as horsepower, number of phases, and number of rotor bars.You cannot change a Component in the read-only CSI Warehouse. How-ever, you can copy the item to the User Warehouse and then edit the configuration. This allows you to modify and then re-use the configuration. The items in the User Warehouse are stored in the usr_cmp.wh database file.

Application Specific Reference Files

Certain AMS Machinery Manager programs such as OilView use special files such as the Oil Reference database file to maintain reference and other information.

HTML Help Files

AMS Machinery Manager utilizes an HTML Help program to provide you with context sensitive Help as you navigate through the AMS Machinery Manager pro-grams. Pressing F1 on the keyboard launches Microsoft Explorer. Explorer displays the same information as is found in the AMS Machinery Manager program user’s manuals in HTML format. These HTML (.chm) files are stored within their own directory.

1-22 Read This First

Page 35: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Chapter 2

Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

The AMS Machinery Manager Database

An AMS Machinery Manager database provides functions to organize all of the information that is required to establish and maintain a reliability based mainte-nance system, and to acquire and store trend, spectral, waveform, and notepad data.

A database assembles Areas, Equipment, and their measurement points using the AMS Machinery Manager database hierarchy, as illustrated in the following chart.

1

Also contained within the database are analysis parameter sets, alarm limit sets, and fault frequency sets which provide information concerning the collection, analysis, display, and storage of the acquired data.

2-1

Page 36: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteRemember to backup your databases frequently.

Areas

Areas are the top level of organization within an AMS Machinery Manager data-base. Each Area contains a collection of Equipment that are logically grouped together based on physical or functional relationships, location, etc., (for example, a paper machine, a winder section, or a power station).

Equipment

Under Areas, Pieces of Equipment are the next level of organization within a data-base. A piece of Equipment is usually a working unit that consists of a driver, a driven unit, and associated components (for example, a pump, a motor, or a gearbox).

Measurement Points

Measurement points are locations or positions on the Equipment where the sensor is placed in order to take a measurement. All measurement points on a piece of Equipment are grouped together under the piece of Equipment.

2-2 Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

Page 37: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Database Capacities

The following table describes the maximum number of each type of information allowed in one database.

DATABASE CATEGORYAMS Machinery Manager

Capacity

Maximum database size 2 gigabytes

# of Analysis Parameter Sets 512 per Technology

# of Alarm Limit Sets 512 per Technology

Fault Frequency Sets 128

Routes per Area 50

Points per Route 1040

Measurement points per piece of Equipment

144

2-3

Page 38: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Analysis Parameter Sets

An analysis parameter set (APS) includes a group of individual analysis parameters that divide the frequency spectrum into bands that are individually measured and analyzed. Each frequency band is designed to contain a segment of the spectrum where specific machinery frequencies occur, such as the 1x turning speed (1xRPM), turning speed harmonics, bearing frequencies, etc.

2

Analysis parameter sets may also contain other non-spectral data such as NxRPM amplitude and phase, DC-Gap, etc. In addition, each analysis parameter set con-tains instructions that tell the machinery analyzer how data are to be collected, ana-lyzed, and stored during data collection for each measurement point.

NoteAnalysis Parameter sets may be set up automatically using the RBM-wizard application.

2-4 Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

Page 39: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteFor Periodic technology, you can have up to 12 individual Analysis Parameter bands per set. For Online technology, you can have up to 24. For Oil technology, you can have up to 96, and for Ultrasonic you can have up to 12 individual Analysis Parameter bands per set.

Analysis Parameter sets are independent of the database hierarchy and can be assigned to many different measurement points on Equipment using one of the following methods:

• Assign user-defined analysis parameter sets.

• Assign from the sixteen (16) default periodic analysis parameter sets, the eleven (11) default ultrasonic parameter sets, and one default oil parameter set that are included with AMS Machinery Manager.

NoteAMS Machinery Manager allows for the creation of up to 512 analysis parameter sets per database. However, since many measurement points can usually be analyzed in an identical manner, it is common for only a few unique parameter sets to be required–even in a large database.

NoteRBMwizard will create sets appropriate for equipment setup and operational conditions.

2-5Analysis Parameter Sets

Page 40: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Alarm Limits

Alarm limits are levels of amplitude that indicate a deteriorating condition on the piece of Equipment being monitored. An alarm limit set consists of an alarm level for the overall signal and separate alarm levels for each individual analysis param-eter. Any overall or parameter level that causes an alarm will be listed in the Mea-surement Exception Analysis Report generated by the EXPORT program module.

NoteThere is no “overall signal” for the Online, Oil, and Ultrasonic com-ponents of AMS Machinery Manager.

Alarm limit sets are independent of the database hierarchy and can be assigned to many different measurement points on Equipment using one of the following methods:

• Assign user-defined alarm parameter sets.

NoteAlarm Limit sets may be set up automatically using the RBMwizard application.

NoteRBMwizard will create sets appropriate for equipment setup and operational conditions.

• Assign from the sixteen (16) default periodic alarm parameter sets, the eleven (11) default ultrasonic parameter sets, and one default oil parameter set that are included with AMS Machinery Manager.

Alarm Levels

The following text describes the various alarm levels used in many of AMS Machinery Manager’s components.

2-6 Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

Page 41: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteOnline and Oil have different alarm level types. Please consult them for specific information.

Fault Level This is the most severe alarm level and indicates Equipment failure. For vibration-type signals, fault alarm values can usually be found in published standards for var-ious types of equipment.

Alert Level This alarm level indicates that the Equipment is approaching failure. The Equip-ment should be evaluated in detail and monitored at shorter intervals.

Weak Side Level The weak side alarm is set at a level below the normal operating amplitude (or above depending on the type of alarm). This alarm level provides protection against improper data collection, or it can be used to test variables where both an increase or a decrease in the amplitude indicates a problem.

Early Warning Alarms Early warning alarm values are statistical in nature and indicate that a measured value has significantly deviated from its typical measurement (but not necessarily exceeded an alarm limit). An early warning alarm usually occurs before the alert level; however, there may be unique instances where these levels are reversed from normal.

One method of calculation establishes this level as equal to the Baseline Ratio (specified in the alarm limit set) times the actual baseline value. For example, if a measured signal is not normally expected to increase by 20% from the baseline value, then setting the Baseline Ratio to1.2 will trigger the early warning alarm should this value exceed 1.2 times the baseline.

The other method establishes a level equal to the calculated mean plus (or minus) the number of Maximum Deviations (specified in the alarm limit set) times the standard deviation. These two levels are then compared, and the more restrictive level is used for the early warning.

2-7Alarm Limits

Page 42: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Baseline Override

If the actual baseline or the calculated mean is less than one-tenth of the specified fault level value, the program assigns a temporary baseline in an effort to reduce false early warning alarms. This temporary baseline is established at a level equal to one-tenth of the fault value as an initial default value.

This initial percentage of the fault value can be modified or deleted by using the Database Global Information option in DBASE, if desired.

Absolute Value

The first four alarm types of AMS Machinery Manager use an absolute value–the alarm level always equals this fixed value. Absolute values are used when the vibra-tion amplitude value (or other measured quantity) should remain relatively con-stant, and equipment degradation is based on an increase or decrease from that value.

Absolute Delta

The last three alarm types use absolute delta–the alarm level that is derived from the baseline value plus or minus the absolute delta value. The baseline value is established from the very first measurement; therefore, there will be no alarm checking for the first measurement. The values taken from the first measurement should be examined carefully to ensure that they are normal and suitable for estab-lishing the alarm levels.

Absolute delta values are used when the vibration amplitude value (or other mea-sured quantity such as phase readings or DC gap voltages) will be found within a wide range of values, but will not normally change significantly from measurement to measurement.

NoteWhen using absolute delta alarm types, it is especially important to make sure the initial baseline value is correct.

2-8 Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

Page 43: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Alarm Types

There are seven types of alarms available for use in the AMS Machinery Manager database.

Dual Upper LevelThe Dual Upper Level alarm type is used when the symptom of approaching failure is an increasing amplitude of the measured signal. This is the most common alarm type used for vibration analysis.

3

2-9Alarm Limits

Page 44: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

In-WindowThe In-Window alarm type provides an alarm when the measured signal enters a specified amplitude range (or “window”) established by the alert and weak side levels. Amplitude values below or above these two levels are considered normal.

4

Out-of-WindowThis alarm type uses the same configuration as the Dual Upper Level alarm. The Out-of-Window alarm type, however, provides an indication on the machinery ana-lyzer for the Lo alarm as protection against collecting an abnormally low measure-ment.

Although the Out-of-Window alarm type is the same as the Dual Upper Level alarm in AMS Machinery Manager, they are treated differently in the Model 2100 series machinery analyzer as shown below.

Dual Upper Out of Window

Fault Level = High Alarm 2 Alert Level = High Alarm 1

Alert Level = High Alarm 1 Weak Side Level = Low

2-10 Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

Page 45: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Dual Lower LevelThe Dual Lower Level alarm type can be used when the symptom of approaching failure is a decreasing amplitude, such as pipe wall thickness.

5

NoteThe Dual Lower Level alarm requires that the Baseline Ratio be spec-ified at a value less than one.

Dual Upper DeltaThis alarm type is similar to the Dual Upper Level alarm except that the alarm levels are specified in absolute delta values, i.e., baseline ± delta values.

6

2-11Alarm Limits

Page 46: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteThe Dual Upper Delta, Dual Window Delta, and Dual Lower Delta alarm types cannot be used with the Model 2100 machinery analyzer.

Dual Lower DeltaThis alarm type is similar to the Dual Lower Level alarm except that the alarm levels are specified in absolute delta values.

7

NoteWhen using the Dual Lower Delta alarm type, the baseline ratio must be specified as a value less than one.

2-12 Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

Page 47: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Dual Window DeltaThe Dual Window Delta alarm type provides alert and fault limits above and below the normal amplitude window. This alarm type is recommended for phase and DC gap measurements. Alarm levels are specified in absolute delta values, i.e., baseline values ± delta values.

8

NoteThe early warning alarm using the baseline ratio and the weak side alarm are not used with the Dual Window Delta alarm type.

2-13Alarm Limits

Page 48: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Alarm Codes in EXPORT

The following alarm codes are generated by the EXPORT program when indi-cating the above alarm types on the various reports:

The “A” alarm code is the result of a trend analysis on each signal parameter in order to detect developing faults that may occur before data are again collected. AMS Machinery Manager uses linear extrapolation on the signal parameter values collected during the three previous months. If the extrapolated value of a param-eter exceeds the Fault Level within a projected three-measurement point interval, a type A alarm code occurs.

AMS Machinery Manager first calculates the data trend slope and its Alarm Code. It then projects Days To Alarm or when the Absolute Fault Level will probably occur. AMS Machinery Manager reports any projection under 300 days. Question marks appear for any projection over 300 days or in cases where insufficient histor-ical data exist to establish a trend.

Alarm Code

Alarm Limit

A The projected measured value will exceed the absolute fault level within three measurement intervals.

Br Early warning alarm produced by the Baseline Ratio.

Bs Early warning alarm produced by the Maximum Deviations.

C Alert Level alarm.

D Fault Level alarm.

V A measured parameter is above the maximum or below the minimum sensor validity alarm.

W A measured parameter is within the range established by the In-Window alarm.

L A measured parameter is below the weak side value with a dual upper alarm type.

Hi A measured parameter is above the weak side value with a dual lower alarm type.

2-14 Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

Page 49: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

For example, Alarm Code D means the vibration level has already reached or exceeded the Absolute Fault Level. Days To Alarm, therefore, shows 0.0 days. When AMS Machinery Manager calculates a negative slope (decreasing vibration levels), three question marks (???) appear for dual upper alarms. AMS Machinery Man-ager also shows the question marks for a flat slope (no change in vibration levels).

2-15Alarm Limits

Page 50: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Alarm Status

Many AMS Machinery Manager applications can optionally display the alarm status of the areas, equipment, and measurement points in the RBM database. The alarm status is based on the most recent data collected or analyzed.

NoteThis alarm status feature will only be enabled if you have purchased RBMview Full.

There are two color schemes for displaying alarm status. One scheme has five cate-gories and the other scheme has three. These schemes can be seen in tree views and alarm/status reports.

NoteNot all tree views and alarm/status reports support alarm status col-orization and icons at this time.

Screen showing Alarm Status icons and nodes.

2-16 Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

Page 51: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Color Scheme Tables

The following tables provide details about the two schemes.

Table 1: Five Color / Icon Scheme

Level Color CSI NameNormal

IconExpired

IconIgnored

IconIndeterminate

Icon

Not Set Clear/White Not Set 9 10i ?

000 Green No Alarm 11 12i ?

001 - 020 Cyan “C” Alarm or Low Alert

13 14i ?

021 - 040 Yellow “C” Alarm or High Alert

15 16i ?

041 - 070 Magenta “D” Alarmor Low Fault

17 18 i ?

071 - 100 Red “D” Alarm or High Fault

19 20 i ?

Table 2: Three Color / Icon Scheme

Level Color CSI NameNormal

IconExpired

IconIgnored

IconIndeterminate

Icon

Not Set Clear/White Not Set 21 22 i ?

000 Green No Alarm 23 24 i ?

001 - 040 Yellow “C” Alarm or Alert

25 26 i ?

041 - 100 Red “D” Alarmor Fault

27 28 i ?

2-17Alarm Status

Page 52: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Applications can assign alarm severities to the following node types: database, area, equipment, component (on-line vibration only), and measurement point. Assign-ment will typically occur at the measurement point level.

After one or more alarms have been reported, a “roll up” process updates the hier-archy. The roll up process looks at all of the severities for the given node and all related nodes or points underneath it. The highest severity is rolled up to the next upper level node as its derived severity. The process is then repeated at this level and rolled up to the next. For example, Measurement Point readings are rolled up the Equipment level, and the Equipment level to the Area level. This continues until the status of the Database level node has been updated.

Explicit alarm severity: an alarm that is specifically set at a given node. Analysis pro-grams, such as Nspectr, MotorView, and Export, set explicit alarms. Communica-tion programs can also set explicit alarms when data is downloaded from an analyzer, such as a 2120, to a database.

NoteMost AMS Machinery Manager programs set explicit alarms at the Measurement Point level. An exception is Corrective, which sets explicit alarms at the Equipment level.

Derived alarm severity: this alarm severity comes from looking at all the alarms beneath a node and selecting the worst alarm as its rating. For example, at the Equipment level, the derived alarm severity will be the worst alarm from all the alarms at the Measurement Point level underneath it. At the Area level, the derived alarm severity will be the worst alarm from all the Equipment levels beneath it. For a visual representation of this hierarchy, see “The AMS Machinery Manager Data-base” on page 2-1.

Not Set alarm severity: indicates an alarm status has not been set.

Each node has a set of alarm severity values. These are broken down by technology and further by analysis type within each technology. For example, when an applica-tion such as Export sets a node’s alarm severity, it will not be setting the overall alarm status. Rather, it will be setting the status for a single technology and analysis type. The overall status can be determined by looking across all of these values.

2-18 Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

Page 53: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Expiration of Alarm StatusWhen an alarm status is set, an expiration date may also be set. This date will typi-cally be calculated based on the monitoring schedule. If a new alarm status is not set prior to the expiration date, the original status expires. The main visual indica-tion of this is that the expired icon is used. The expired icons are identical to the normal icons minus color. Therefore, you can still see the severity level by looking at the icon, but it does not stand out visually.

Ignore Alarm StatusAn additional state that may be applied to a Technology or Analysis Type at a node is “ignore.” Setting the ignore state will prevent a given node’s status from influ-encing the derived status of other nodes. A node’s status is not overwritten when it is ignored.

Indeterminate Alarm StatusIf for any reason alarm status cannot be determined (e.g., read fails from DB, etc.), the indeterminate icon is displayed.

User Interaction

The following describes the alarm status display features of AMS Machinery Man-ager tree views.

2-19Alarm Status

Page 54: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

• Severity icons will be placed on the right side of the node type icon

Screen showing severity icons and context sensitive dialog box.

• When you right click on a given node in the tree, a context sensitive dialog box appears from which you may select:

Context sensitive dialog box

2-20 Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

Page 55: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Alarm Details…Click to display the Alarm Details dialog box

Alarm Details dialog box with “Show Analysis Types Per Technology” selected.

Area, Equipment, Measurement Point — Click on this button to select a different Area, Equipment, and Measurement Point than the one originally selected. This will allow you to look at other areas of the database tree without having to move around on the tree.

NoteIf you do not see the “3-dot” button beside the Measurement Point listing, it means an Equipment has not been selected and the box beside Equipment is empty. To select a piece of Equipment to look at, click on the “3-dot” button and select. Once you have selected, the “3-dot” button will appear beside the Measurement Point box.

Close — This closes the Alarm Details.... box.

2-21Alarm Status

Page 56: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

View Alarm... — Click on a Technology with an alarm, and then click on the View Alarm button and a second dialog box appears.

View Alarm dialog box. Note the information in the Area, Equipment, and Measurement Point text areas.

The View Alarm dialog box gives you details on the explicit alarm, which set the alarm severity level. Details include the Area, Equipment, and Measurement Point of the alarm. This information may not have been in the Alarm Details box. For example, you may have selected View Alarm for a Derived alarm. If so, the Area, Equipment, and Measurement Point context for the View Alarm dialog will be dif-ferent than it was on the Alarm Details dialog.

You have two methods for exiting the View Alarm dialog box. You may press the Alarm Details button in this dialog box. This will take you back to the Alarm Details dialog box. However, the Area, Equipment, and Measurement Point context of the Alarm Details dialog box will be changed to match the context of this, the View Alarm dialog box.

2-22 Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

Page 57: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

The second method of exiting is to press the Close button. This will take you back to the Alarm Details dialogue box, but the context of the Alarm Details dialog will not be changed.

Changing the Area, Equipment, and Measurement Point context will allow you to see any other alarms associated with this measurement point because the Alarm Details dialog box will display all the alarms associated with this point. For example, these could be an online alarm and a vibration alarm associated with a measure-ment point, or there could be two types of vibration analysis alarms associated with a measurement point.

Set Ignore — If you wish to ignore an alarm for a technology or analysis type, first click on an alarm, and then click on this button. An “i” appears in the Severity column and the alarm is ignored when compiling the alarm status.

NoteAn ignore alarm can be established even for an alarm that hasn’t been set.

Clear Ignore — If you want to undo an alarm that has been set to be ignored, select that alarm, and then click on the Clear Ignore button. The “i” disappears and the status of that alarm appears.

Show Analysis Types Per Technology — Click in the check box beside this text in order to show all the analysis types set for a technology. Unclicking the box shows only the Technologies.

NoteWhen you show only the Technologies, the highest alarm for all anal-ysis types for each technology is displayed. This will cause analysis type alarms that have lower severities to be hidden. For example, if a Vibra-tion-Parameter alarm has a severity of 60 and a Vibration-Envelope alarm has a severity of 30, you would only see the Vibration-Parameter alarm. It would not be obvious that a Vibration-Envelope alarm exists.

2-23Alarm Status

Page 58: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Use Alarm Tree Technology Filters — Click on the check box beside this text in order to use the filters established for the technologies selected. Filters are estab-lished under each technology and can be turned off and on by clicking on Alarm Tree Filters and selecting the filters you want to turn on or off. See below for details on Alarm Tree Filters.

Refresh Alarm SeveritiesRecalculates the alarm severity for the selected node and refreshes the display with the updated values.

Alarm Display Options…Click to display the Alarm Display Options dialog box

29

You can set the following preferences:

Display Color Scheme — Select either 3 or 5 levels for color/icon scheme. See “Color Scheme Tables” on page 2-17 for details. The default is 5.

Show Alarm severity icons — Select to enable or disable icon display. The default is enable.

Show an icon for no alarm or normal — Select to show or hide the “No Alarm” icon. See “Color Scheme Tables” on page 2-17 for details. The default is hide.

Show an icon when no analysis has been performed — Select to show or hide the “Not Set” icon. See “Color Scheme Tables” on page 2-17 for details. The default is hide.

2-24 Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

Page 59: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Automatic repaint interval in minutes — This feature is most useful on network installations. It controls the frequency with which the icons on the database tree are automatically updated by reading the values from the database. This will allow changes made by one user to be seen on another user’s computer without the second user having to close and re-open AMS Machinery Manager programs. The default is 0, which means that automatic repaint is disabled.

NoteThe icons on the database tree are only available if you have pur-chased RBMview Full.

Alarm Tree Filters…Click to display the Alarm Tree Filters dialog box.

30

This box displays the different technologies. Those technologies with check marks in the boxes beside them will be the ones with active Alarm Tree Filters. You can turn on the filters for an entire technology category by checking in the box beside the category head of a technology. For example, you can check Periodic Vibration and it will turn on all the analysis types under that Technology category. Or you can check those individual analysis types you want filtered.

2-25Alarm Status

Page 60: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

By default, the tree will show the status for all technologies that the user has pur-chased. However, applications may set a filter to limit the number of technologies for which status is displayed. For example, OilView may choose to set a filter to only display Oil Technology statuses.

You can also click on the box beside “Use these filters for all programs” to turn on the filters for all the technologies. Doing so changes the dialog box heading to “Global Alarm Tree Filters.”

Global Alarm Tree Filters dialog box

If this is checked, all AMS Machinery Manager programs will use the same filters and the filters set here will apply to all AMS Machinery Manager programs. If this is not checked, the filters set here will only apply to the current program.

2-26 Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

Page 61: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Fault Frequencies

Fault frequencies identify specific frequencies within the vibration spectra of a piece of Equipment whose amplitude patterns may indicate potential failure; for example, bearings, gears, belts, etc. Fault frequencies are represented as dotted lines that are superimposed on a displayed spectral plot and indicate the location on the plot where peaks would occur if Equipment faults develop.

Fault frequencies can be defined in the measurement point setup menus and/or fault frequency sets can be assigned to individual measurement points.

The following is an example spectral plot generated with the Plotdata Diagnostic Plotting module, illustrating the application of a fault frequency set. Each fault fre-quency is identified with a letter at the top of the associated dotted line and listed on the right side of the plot.

31

NoteFault Frequencies is an optional, advanced feature and is not essential in order for the system to function properly.

2-27Fault Frequencies

Page 62: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteIf an equipment is configured using RBMwizard, then fault frequen-cies can be automatically generated in Plotdata using this configura-tion information.

NoteFault Frequencies are automatically generated by Plotdata using con-figuration information. It does not create fault frequency setups on the measurement point.

2-28 Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

Page 63: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

AMS Machinery Manager Main Menu Options

This section describes the options and functions available from the AMS Machinery Manager Main Menu.

AMS Machinery Manager Main Menu

File Menu Items

The File pulldown menu options are described in the following sections.

NoteYou can also access many of these options using the right-mouse func-tion. The right-mouse functions are described in “Tools Menu Right-Mouse Functions” on page 2-39 below.

2-29AMS Machinery Manager Main Menu Options

Page 64: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Open DatabaseClicking on Open Database opens the following dialog box. Only the databases applicable to the current user are displayed.

32

These functions allow you to select a database for use by AMS Machinery Manager.

Current Group - Shows the group that is currently active.

DB Name - Lists the names of the databases that are listed in the active group, which is shown as the Current Group at the top of this window.

Select Database As Read Only - Allows you to read from (and not write to) the selected database.

Sort by Most Recently Used Order- Displays the databases with the most recently accessed database at the top of the list.

Show Database Server - Select this option to display the name of the Database Server associated with each database.

2-30 Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

Page 65: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Add Group - Displays a dialog box that allows you to add a new group to your group list. This box also appears if you had select Edit Group. See Edit Group below for details.

Remove Group - removes a selected group from the Available Groups list.

Edit Group - Allows you to determine the properties of the selected database group. When you click Edit Group, the dialog box below appears.

33

The text windows and buttons of the Edit Group dialog box provide the following capabilities.

Group Name: - shows the name of the group being edited or created.

Selected Databases - Lists the names of databases that have been assigned to the selected group.

Available Databases - Lists databases from your database list that have not been assigned to the selected group.

Add - Takes the databases selected from the Available Databases list and moves them to the Selected Databases list.

Remove - Removes selected databases from the Selected Databases list and returns them to the Available Databases list.

Set Password - This option allows you to create a new group password. After a pass-word has been set for a group, you must enter the password to access the group.

Clear Password - This option allows you to clear the existing group password. Use this option if you want to remove the password protection from a group.

2-31AMS Machinery Manager Main Menu Options

Page 66: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteDatabase groups are not automatically password protected. You must assign a password to each database group you want protected.

Once the group is set up to your liking, click on the OK button.

Edit Database List - If this button appears on your Database Selection dialog box, you are permitted to change our personal database list. Clicking on Edit Database List opens the dialog box shown below.

34

The databases in your database List are listed in the User Databases list of the dialog box. Other databases available to your AMS Machinery Manager system are shown in the System Databases list.

These functions allow you to modify your Database List.

Add - Takes the databases selected in the System Databases list and adds them to the User Databases list. Under System Databases, highlight a database you want to move, then click on the Add button.

Remove - Removes the databases selected in the User Databases list from the list and returns them to the System Databases list. Under User Databases, highlight a database you want to move, then click on the Removebutton.

Show Database Server - select this option to display the name of he Database Server associated with each database in the User Databases and System Databases lists.

Once your Database List contains the desired databases, click OK.

2-32 Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

Page 67: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Set DB Password - This option allows you to create a new database password. After a password has been set for a database, you must enter this password to access the database.

NoteYou may need to access the same database more than once in a single session, for example, for use in the DBASE and PLOTDATA pro-grams. AMS Machinery Manager records your access to the last ten databases and only requires you to enter your password once for each database. If you access more than 10 password protected databases, the record of your access to the most recently used database replaces that for the first database you used. When you log off from your AMS Machinery Manager session, the list of passwords is always cleared.

Clear DB Password - This option allows you to clear the existing database pass-word. Use this option if you do not want the database to be password protected.

Synchronize Reference DataSelect this option to resynchronize reference data used by certain AMS Machinery Manager technologies. When launching an AMS Machinery Manager program or opening a database, you may receive a prompt which informs you that reference data is not synchronized with the database. Use this option to resynchronize the ref-erence data.

Synchronize Reference Data on StartupSelect this option to resynchronize reference data used by certain AMS Machinery Manager technologies each time AMS Machinery Manager is launched.

Register AMS Machinery Manager ServersUse this option to manually update the Windows registry to register the correct path for required programs (.exe, .dll, and .ocx files). This registration require-ment is primarily for the RBMView and Component Design Studio applications.

2-33AMS Machinery Manager Main Menu Options

Page 68: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Add AMS Machinery Manager Program Opens a dialog which allows you to add additional AMS Machinery Manager pro-gram modules.

35

Program Name - Select the program module.

Description - This field displays the full descriptive name of the program.

Tab Display - Select “Program Name” to display only the program name acronym in the active tab window. Select “Description” to display the descriptive name of the program in the active tab window.

Tabs - Select the program category tab(s) to which the program will be assigned:

• Setup/Communications

• Analysis

• Document/Report

• Favorites

The program icon and name will be displayed on the tab windows you select here.

Technology Type - The program can be assigned to one or more Technology Types. Select the Technology Types to which you want the program assigned:

• Portable Vibration

• Tribology

• Ultrasonics

• Motor

2-34 Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

Page 69: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

• Thermography

• Corrective Jobs

• Status Technologies

• Online

Icon - Displays the icon for the selected program.

Autostart Program - Check this box to automatically start the program when you launch AMS Machinery Manager.

Delete ProgramChoose this option to delete a selected program from all tab windows. A message will be displayed asking you to confirm this action.

NoteUsing the ‘Delete Program’ option only removes the program entry and icon from the AMS Machinery Manager Main menu. It does not remove the program from your computer.

NoteYou can restore an AMS Machinery Manager program you have deleted with the ‘Restore Default AMS Machinery Manager Pro-gram’ function described below.

Restore Default AMS Machinery Manager Program Select this option to restore an AMS Machinery Manager program which was removed with the ‘Delete program’ command on the File menu or was modified using the Program Properties command on the Modify menu.

Add Program Select this option to add a non-AMS Machinery Manager program (such as Win-dows Notepad or Calculator) to an AMS Machinery Manager tab window. This will allow you to launch the program from within AMS Machinery Manager.

Program Name - Enter the full path and name of the program, or browse to locate the program.

2-35AMS Machinery Manager Main Menu Options

Page 70: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Description - Enter the description you want to appear in the AMS Machinery Manager tab window.

Tab Display - Select ‘Program Name’ to display only the program name in the active tab window. Select ‘Description’ to display the descriptive name of the pro-gram in the active tab window.

Tabs - Select the program category tab(s) to which the program will be assigned:

• Setup/Communications

• Analysis

• Document/Report

• Favorites

The program name will be displayed on the tab windows you select here.

Technology Type - The program can be assigned to one or more Technology Types. Select the Technology Types to which you want the program assigned:

• Portable Vibration

• Tribology

• Ultrasonics

• Motor

• Thermography

• Corrective Jobs

• Status Technologies

• Online

2-36 Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

Page 71: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Shortcut Bar

Find Shortcut Bar selection under File

Select this option to display a shortcut bar for the selected tab window, for example, Setup/Communications. Click on the File heading in the Menu bar, then click on Shortcut Bar. This option will hide the AMS Machinery Manager Main Menu and bring up the Shortcut Bar with the icons for tab selection showing.

Setup/Communications Shortcut Bar

To launch an AMS Machinery Manager program, simply click on the appropriate button. To access Menu Bar/File and other options, use the right-mouse function. See “Shortcut Bar Right-Mouse Functions” on page 2-40 for more information.

To select a different program category tab, use the right-mouse function to display the menu options and select a different program category. The buttons associated with the selected program category will be displayed on the Shortcut Bar.

You can reposition the shortcut bar by clicking anywhere in the bar and dragging toward the side of the monitor you want the bar to appear. For example, to move the bar to the right side of the monitor, click anywhere in the bar, and while holding down the mouse button, drag to the right.

2-37AMS Machinery Manager Main Menu Options

Page 72: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

To restore the AMS Machinery Manager Main Menu, use the right mouse function to deselect the “Shortcut Bar” option.

Log On As Different UserBrings up the Login screen to allow a different user to logon.

Change Customer Data DirectoryAvailable only in Power User mode. This function allows the user to switch AMS Machinery Manager to a different CustData directory.

Confirm ExitDetermines whether or not you receive an “Are you sure you want to exit?” prompt each time you exit AMS Machinery Manager.

ExitExits the AMS Machinery Manager program.

2-38 Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

Page 73: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Tools Menu Right-Mouse Functions

Use the right-mouse functions to quickly access frequently used options. With the pointer anywhere on the “Tools” tab, click the right-mouse button to open the options.

Add AMS Machinery Manager ProgramUse this to add other AMS programs. Options include a “Program Name” drop-down list, “Description” field, “Tab Display” radio buttons to select which you would prefer be displayed on the tabs, Checkboxes for the tab you want the pro-gram added to, and then checkboxes to select the “Technology Type” for which the program is designed.

36

Add External ProgramThis window is, essentially, a dupliate of that used for adding AMS Manager pro-grams. The functionality is virtually the same.

2-39AMS Machinery Manager Main Menu Options

Page 74: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

The one difference is that rather than a drop-down menu under “Program Name”, the arrow button will launch a “Specify Program to Add” window where you may navigate your drives to find the program of interest and add it tothe software.

37

Shortcut Bar Right-Mouse Functions

Use the right-mouse functions to quickly access these options when using the Shortcut Bar. With the pointer anywhere in the Shortcut Bar, click the right-mouse button to open the menu of options. Many of these right -mouse options are also available from the Menu Bar/File menu (see “File Menu Items” on page 2-29 for more information).

NoteStandard Windows right-mouse options are available by moving the mouse pointer off the Shortcut Bar and clicking the right-mouse button. See your MS-Windows documentation for information about these options.

2-40 Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

Page 75: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Open Database...Opens the “Open Database” dialog. See “Open Database” on page 2-30 for more information.

Synchronize Reference DataInitiates reference data synchronization. See “Synchronize Reference Data” on page 2-33 for more information.

Synchronize Reference Data on StartupWhen this option is selected, reference data is automatically synchronized each time AMS Machinery Manager is launched. See “Synchronize Reference Data on Startup” on page 2-33 for more information.

File Locations...Opens the “Alternate Directory Locations” dialog which allows you to review and for certain items, change the default file locations for files used by AMS Machinery Manager.

38

Help Index Directory - Displays the directory where the HTML Help files for AMS Machinery Manager are stored. Use the Arrow button to browse for a different disk or directory.

If you did not install the HTML Help files, you can access Help directly from the AMS Machinery Manager CD or from a shared network location by specifying the path and directory in this field.

2-41AMS Machinery Manager Main Menu Options

Page 76: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Manuals Directory - Displays the directory where the Adobe Acrobat .PDF files for the AMS Machinery Manager user manuals are stored. Use the Arrow button to browse for a different disk or directory.

If you did not install the .PDF manual files, you can access them from the AMS Machinery Manager CD or from a shared network location by specifying the path and directory in this field.

DB Server - Displays the location of the AMS Machinery Manager DB Server. If you are running AMS Machinery Manager from your local hard drive, this field will dis-play ‘localhost.’ If you are running a network installation of AMS Machinery Man-ager, this field will display the location on the network of the AMS Machinery Manager DB Server.

NoteThe remaining file locations are set during installation, and cannot be changed.

Default DB DirectoryDisplays the directory where new databases are saved by default.

Program Category OptionsThis section of the right-mouse menu displays the program category options. Select a program category to display the program buttons on the Shortcut bar assigned to this category.

AutohideSelect this option to hide the Shortcut Bar when you have an AMS Machinery Man-ager program running. To display the Shortcut Bar, simply move the mouse pointer to where the shortcut bar is hidden.

Always on topSelect this option to always display the Shortcut Bar at the top of the display.

Shortcut BarDeselect this option to display the AMS Machinery Manager Main Menu.

ExitSelect this option to exit AMS Machinery Manager.

2-42 Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

Page 77: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

View Menu Items

Refresh TreeSelect this option to refresh the Navigator tree.

Help Menu Items

ContentsOpens MS Explorer to display AMS Machinery Manager HTML Help.

Help Toolbar Options

Hide/Show - Hides or displays the Navigation tools at the left of the window.

Back - Click this button to navigate to the previous page displayed in the HTML Help window.

Print - Click this button to open a standard MS-Windows print dialog to allow you to print the page displayed in the HTML Help window.

Options

Hide/Show Tabs - Hides or displays the Navigation tools at the left of the window.

Back - Click this button to navigate to the previous page displayed in the HTML Help window.

Forward - Click this button to navigate to the next page to be displayed in the HTML Help window.

Home - Moves to the introductory “Read this first” section of HTML Help.

Stop - Stop loading the page in the HTML Help window.

Refresh - Reload the currently displayed page in the HTML Help window.

Internet Options - Displays options for your version of Microsoft Internet Explorer.

Customize - This option is not currently available.

2-43AMS Machinery Manager Main Menu Options

Page 78: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Print - Click this button to open a standard MS-Windows print dialog to allow you to print the page displayed in the HTML Help window.

Search Highlighting Off - If you have selected text in the current Help topic, click this button to remove the highlighting from the text.

Navigation Window

Contents Tab - Displays the contents of the AMS Machinery Manager HTML Help for the active AMS Machinery Manager program. Click on any item to navigate to the section. Click the “+” plus symbol to the left of the item to display additional sub-sections.

Index Tab - Displays a list of topics in alphabetical order. Click on any topic to navigate to the section which covers the topic.

Search Tab - Displays a search dialog. Enter text in the keywords field, then click ‘List Topics’ to search for topics related to the keywords you entered. The search engine will display these topics in the list box.

HTML Help Window

This window displays the contents of the HTML Help. The information is the same as that available from the printed AMS Machinery Manager manuals or from the Acrobat.PDF files available on the AMS Machinery Manager CD.

Help on HelpActivates HTML Help to provide instructions on how to use HTML Help itself.

Glossary of Technical TermsActivates HTML Help to display a glossary of the technical terminology employed in AMS Machinery Manager.

About AMSTM Suite: Machinery HealthTM ManagerSelect this option to display the date, version, and copyright information about the AMS Machinery Manager program.

Show Patents - Click this button to display a list of patents which apply to AMS Machinery Manager.

2-44 Overview of AMS Machinery Manager

Page 79: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Chapter 3

Database Setup/Management – DBASE

DBASE Overview

The Database Setup/Management (DBASE) program enables you to establish and maintain an AMS Machinery Manager database. It provides options for cre-ating a new database and adding, deleting, modifying, or printing database infor-mation.

From the Setup/Communications tab of the AMS Machinery Manager main menu, select Database Setup. The Database Management Functions menu will then be displayed.

Database Management Functions Main Menu

3-1

Page 80: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Before getting started with the DBASE program, we need to discuss options that are available from the top (main) menu. The pulldown menus on this screen provide some important functions that are discussed in the followingsections.

File Menu Items

The File pulldown menu provides the following options.

1

3-2 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 81: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Open DatabaseClicking on Open Database opens the following dialog box. Only the databases applicable to the current user are displayed.

2

These functions allow you to select a database for use by AMS Machinery Manager.

Current Group - Shows the group that is currently active.

DB Name - Lists the names of the databases that are listed in the active group, which is shown as the Current Group at the top of this window.

Select Database As Read Only - Allows you to read from (and not write to) the selected database.

Sort by Most Recently Used Order- Displays the databases with the most recently accessed database at the top of the list.

Show Database Server - Select this option to display the name of the Database Server associated with each database.

Select Group - You can use this button to select a database group. Database groups are comprised of specific databases found in the Default Group. (The Default Group contains all databases in your personal Database list.) Each user can specify their own unique database groups, and only the groups applicable to the current user are displayed.

3-3

Page 82: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Grouping databases provides a convenient way to create reports or analyze data using multiple databases, and it makes it easier to search for a specific database. A password and group name can only be assigned to database groups that have been created in this way, since the Default Group does not support a password or a group name.

NoteWhen connected to a machinery analyzer, if a Database Group is defined and currently active, and CSICOM’s Password Setup is set to “ON”, you will be prompted to type in the Database Group’s password and group name.

Clicking Select Group causes the dialog box shown below to appear.

Group Selection Buttons

3

To back out of the Group Selection dialog box, click on the Cancel button.

Other Buttons. The other buttons discussed below allow you to manage your per-sonal database groups.

Add Group - Displays a dialog box that allows you to add a new group to your group list. This box also appears if you had select Edit Group. See Edit Group below for details.

Remove Group - removes a selected group from the Available Groups list.

3-4 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 83: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Edit Group - Allows you to determine the properties of the selected database group. When you click Edit Group, the dialog box below appears.

4

The text windows and buttons of the Edit Group dialog box provide the following capabilities.

Group Name: - shows the name of the group being edited or created.

Selected Databases - Lists the names of databases that have been assigned to the selected group.

Available Databases - Lists databases from your database list that have not been assigned to the selected group.

Add - Takes the databases selected from the Available Databases list and moves them to the Selected Databases list.

Remove - Removes selected databases from the Selected Databases list and returns them to the Available Databases list.

Set Password - This option allows you to create a new group password. After a pass-word has been set for a group, you must enter the password to access the group.

Clear Password - This option allows you to clear the existing group password. Use this option if you want to remove the password protection from a group.

NoteDatabase groups are not automatically password protected. You must assign a password to each database group you want protected.

3-5

Page 84: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Once the group is set up to your liking, click on the OK button.

Edit Database List - If this button appears on your Database Selection dialog box, you are permitted to change the personal database list. Clicking on Edit Database List opens the dialog box shown below.

5

The databases in your database List are listed in the User Databases list of the dialog box. Other databases available to your AMS Machinery Manager system are shown in the System Databases list.

These functions allow you to modify your Database List.

Add - Takes the databases selected in the System Databases list and adds them to the User Databases list. Under System Databases, highlight a database you want to move, then click on the Add button.

Remove - Removes the databases selected in the User Databases list from the list and returns them to the System Databases list. Under User Databases, highlight a database you want to move, then click on the Removebutton.

Show Database Server - select this option to display the name of he Database Server associated with each database in the User Databases and System Databases lists.

Once your Database List contains the desired databases, click OK.

Print SetupDisplays the Print dialog box which allows you to select the destination printer, printing range, number of copies, etc.

Output DestinationDisplays the Output Destination dialog box which allows you to select where the files will be sent, the margin dimensions, etc.

3-6 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 85: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Build DB From MasterProvides a logical series of steps that are used to set up a database using an existing database.

6

Click on the first Browse button to select the file you want to use as the master (source) database. Selected Area and Equipment information will be copied from the source database to the target database. Click on the second Browse button to select the file you want to use as the target database, or click on the Create New button to create a new database to be used as the target.

NoteIf you choose the Create New option for the target database, you will need to follow some additional steps to initially set up the database. For more information, see “Database Global Information (Periodic)” on page 3-83.

Choose one of the following in the Analysis Parameter, Alarm Limit, Fault Fre-quency Sets field.

Copy These Sets from the MASTER Database - Existing sets from the master (source) database will be transferred to the target database when-ever an associated measurement point is selected.

3-7

Page 86: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Use Sets Defined in the TARGET Database - No Sets will be transferred to the target database. This option is selected whenever the target database already contains the required analysis parameter/alarm limit sets or if these sets are to be created at a later time.

Select MASTER EquipmentAfter you have selected the Master and Target databases from the previous screen, the Select MASTER Equipment screen will appear. Select the Equipment that you want to copy to the Target database that you previously selected.

7

The Select, Config Info, and Config Setup options are available when the data-base tree displays in the ADD/EDIT tree structure main function, and also when Selecting Master Equipment displays in the Build from Master Function.

Press Config Info to get a list of configuration information that you entered when you configured the equipment in the Database Wizard.

Press Config Setup to view the bitmap generated by the Database Wizard.

After selecting the Target Equipment, click Select to copy to the target. After you click Select, you can edit the parameters of the copied Equipment. For complete information on each of the variables on this screen, see “Edit (Equipment)” on page 3-30. After editing parameters, click OK to continue.

3-8 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 87: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Equipment Parameters

2130 hardware can analyze two or three paired measurement points simulta-neously. To take advantage of this new hardware feature, you can pair measure-ment points in a few ways.

Pair measurement points manually from the Edit Equipment Parameters screen (above) by pressing Mod Grp/Ch #.

3-9

Page 88: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Group/Channel Number Summary

You can take two measurement points simultaneously if they have the same Group and Channel numbers. Start Group numbers at 21; channels 1-20 are used to set up tri-axial sensors.

3-10 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 89: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Gather PntsTo pair points automatically, use the Gather Pnts - > Grps option from the Tools menu of the ADD/EDIT Database Structure dialog box.

By selecting the Gather Pnts - > Grps option, DBASE attempts to pair the measure-ment points. You must have used one of the measurement point ID characters to denote the component for this function to work. All (up to 3) measurement points with the same component character, sensor type, sensor position, and sensor orien-tation are paired.

If the equipment is highlighted, then the measurement points for that equipment are paired. If an area is highlighted, then DBASE goes through all the equipment in that area. If the database is highlighted, DBASE goes through all the equipment in all areas of the database.

3-11

Page 90: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

The next screen allows you to modify technology-specific parameters. For more information, see “Equipment Parameters” on page 3-31.

8

If you created multiple copies of a piece of Equipment on the Equipment Parame-ters screen, the following screen will appear. This screen allows you to set the ID, Description, Reference RPM, and Reference Load for each copy of the Equip-ment.

9

3-12 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 91: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

After you have set the technology parameters and the Multiple Equipment Copy Parameters, click the OK button and the Modify Measurement Points Control Panel will appear.

10

This screen provides a convenient way to modify individual point parameters or to modify fault frequencies.

3-13

Page 92: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Modify Point Parameters - This window lists the measurement points that are assigned to the new equipment, and can also be used to add, delete, and/or modify a measurement point.

11

Modify Fault Frequencies - This function provides a simple way to modify fault fre-quencies for a new piece of equipment. For more information on setting up fault frequencies, see “Fault Frequency Set Information (Periodic)” on page 3-70.

12

3-14 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 93: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

After clicking OK, the database tree for your newly created or updated database is displayed. Select an Area from the tree to place the copied Equipment, then click the Select button. At this point, you can also create a new Area in which to place the copied Equipment.

13

Create DatabaseDisplays the Create new Database dialog box which allows you to select the server and new database name. Accepting this dialog box displays the two-tab Database Global Parameters dialog boxes. The Function Bar button DB Reference allows you to display (and modify) Database Global Parameters. The Function Bar button Comp Files allows you to browse (and select) the various database filenames, paths, etc. required to manage your AMS Machinery Manager data. Accepting these dialog boxes completes the creation of the new Database.

Create Oil Ref DBAllows you to create a blank Oil Reference Database where “clean” (reference) data can be stored. This data can then be used as a reference when “dirty” oil data has been collected.

NoteDBASE is only used to create the blank Oil Reference database — the OILVIEW application is used for oil data processing.

3-15

Page 94: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Edit Menu Items

Edit functions are not active from the DBASE main menu dialog box.

View Menu Items

Function BarAllows you to toggle the Function Bar on or off.

Listing Function BarToggles the Function Bar that appears on right side of listing screens On or Off. When turned on, the is OK and Pause/Continue buttons are present.

NoteThese same functions can still be performed, even when the Listing Function Bar is toggled to Off, by using the buttons on the top Toolbar.

Tree OptionsBrings up the Tree Options dialog box which allows you to select the available tech-nology Measurement Points that you want to display. Similarly, if you leave a tech-nology(s) unchecked, measurement points for that technology will not be displayed. However, even when a technology is not checked in View/Tree Options, you can still create measurement point(s) for that technology from the Equipment level screen.

Hierarchy Menu Items

DatabaseBrings up the Database Selection dialog box that was described in “Open Data-base” on page 3-3.

3-16 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 95: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Tools Menu Items

Set Assignment SummaryThis option displays the Set Assignment Summary Options dialog box which allows you to select which of the following you want reports on:

• Analysis Parameter Sets

• Alarm Limit Sets

• Fault Frequency Sets

This dialog box also allows you to select the technologies that you want to include in the reports. After making your selections and clicking OK, the Set Assignment Summary report is displayed.

14

This report lists the set numbers, descriptions, and number of references for the options previously selected (Analysis Parameter Sets, etc.).

3-17

Page 96: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Show Tree HierarchyThis function generates a global report for the selected database. This report lists each area, component, equipment, and measurement point in hierarchical order for the selected database.

Tools Menu | Show Tree Hierarchy Report

Chg TchnlogyBrings up the Change Technology dialog box which allows you to select the default technology screens that will be displayed (this option is also available from the Function Bar).

Help Menu Items

HelpAccesses the AMS Machinery Manager online help documents to assist in your information searches.

NoteThis option is also available by clicking on the Help Toolbar icon.

3-18 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 97: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

AboutBrings up a dialog box that lists the version number, creation date, and copyright information about the DBASE program.

3-19

Page 98: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Main Menu Options

The options on Database Management Functions main menu are discussed in the following sections.

Database Management Functions Main Menu

3-20 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 99: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Chg TchnlogyClicking on the Chg Tchnlogy Function Bar button Brings up the Change Tech-nology dialog box which allows you to select the default technology screens that will be displayed (this option is also available from the Tools pulldown menu).

15

Default Technology Selection — At this level, selecting a default Technology from the Change Technology pop-up window is used to access that specific technology information in the database (analysis parameter sets, alarm limit sets, predefined notes, etc.). In fact, this type of information can only be accessed by prior selection of the appro-priate Technology.

However, when managing tree elements, when a new measurement point is requested (at the equipment level), DBASE assumes that you want a measurement point for the “default technology.” The program then defaults to this technology (if allowed). You can also create a measurement point for another technology and are not limited to the default technology. When a measurement point of another technology is created, the program automatically changes its default to that technology.

Highlighting the default technology desired and clicking OK will return you to the RBM Database Management Functions main menu.

3-21Main Menu Options

Page 100: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteAlthough the Tree Structure option is generic and the descriptions apply to all Technologies, the remaining options may vary, depending on which default Technology is selected. To provide an orderly way of showing these variations in dialog box structures that are available for different technologies, the remaining five functions on the main menu (Analysis Parameter/Data Acquisition, Alarm Limit/Data Evaluation, etc.) will be shown according to a specific technology. In other words, all of the dialog boxes for Periodic Tech-nology will be shown, then all of the dialog boxes for Oil Technology, etc.

To exit the Change Technology dialog box, click on the OK button. The dialog box returns to Database Management Functions.

Database Management Functions dialog box

3-22 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 101: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Tree Structure

The following Tree Structure descriptions apply to all technologies. Double-clicking on “Tree Structure” in the RBM Database Management Functions dialog box brings up the ADD/EDIT Database Tree Structure dialog box.

16

Clicking on the + symbol to the left of a Database allows you to expand it to Areas. Clicking on the + symbol to the left of an area allows you to expand it to Equipment. Clicking on the + symbol to the left of a piece of Equipment allows you to expand it to the Measurement Point(s) level. Highlighting any item on the tree (from Area to Equipment to Point) enables you to use any of the seven Function Bar options: Edit, New, Copy, Add Branch, Summary, Move, or Delete.

3-23Main Menu Options

Page 102: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

MPnt Set AssignmentsAccessed by using the Tools pulldown menu or pressing Ctrl-A, this option displays the Meas Point Set Assignment Options dialog box.

17

Analysis Parameter Set: — the choices are Do Not Display Any Set IDs, Display All Set IDs, or Display Only Matching Set IDs.

Set ID to Match: — this three-character field is used with the Display Only Matching Set IDs option.

Alarm Limit Set: — the choices are Do Not Display Any Set IDs, Display All Set IDs, or Display Only Matching Set IDs.

Set ID to Match: — this three-character field is used with the Display Only Matching Set IDs option.

Fault Frequency Set: — the choices are Do Not Display Any Set IDs, Display All Set IDs, or Display Only Matching Set IDs.

Set ID to Match: — this three-character field is used with the Display Only Matching Set IDs option.

Technologies to Include: — place a checkmark to select the technologies desired.

3-24 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 103: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

After selecting a Technology(s) and clicking OK, the Measurement Point Set Assignment Summary Report is displayed.

18

3-25Main Menu Options

Page 104: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Fault Freq. ValuesAccessed by using the Tools pulldown menu or pressing Ctrl-F, this option displays the Print Fault Frequency Values Options dialog box.

19

Frequency Units: the choices are CPM, Hz, or Orders.

For Reference, Use Speed: the choices are On Measurement Point or Entered Below.

Enter RPM to Use: RPM value that you want to use for the reference speed.

Tree Element SummaryThis feature allows you get a summary list of the information for the database you have opened. This summary can include equipment list information such as Equipment ID, Measurement Points, Type of Equipment, Speed / Load, and Clas-sification.

3-26 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 105: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

First, double-click on “Tree Structure” in the RBM Database Management Func-tions dialog box.

RBM Database Management Functions dialog box

A database tree appears on the screen.

Next, click on Tools to drop the menu.

An example database tree with Tools menu selected.

3-27Main Menu Options

Page 106: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Then, select Tree Element Summary. If the database itself is highlighted, then an Entire Database Summary Options dialog box appears.

Entire Database Summary dialog box

Now, click on the arrow at the right side of the text box and from the drop menu select No Equipment List, Simple Equipment List, or Detailed Equipment List.

If an area under a database is highlighted, then an Area Summary Options dialog box appears. From that dialog box, click on the arrow at the right side of the of the text box and select Either Simple Equipment List or Detailed Equipment List.

Finally, click on the OK button and a summary list is generated and appears on the computer screen.

To exit the list, press the OK button again.

3-28 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 107: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Periodic Technology

This section describes Periodic Technology dialog boxes.

Edit (Area)From the ADD/EDIT Database Tree Structure dialog box, with an Area selected, clicking on Edit (Function Bar option) displays the Area Parameters dialog box with the following options.

20

Area Description: — can contain up to 32 characters and should be as descriptive and unique as possible.

Area ID: — can contain up to four characters and must be unique for each Area in the database. Optionally, both the Area Description and ID can appear on plots and reports

3-29Periodic Technology

Page 108: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Edit (Equipment)With a piece of Equipment selected, clicking on Edit (Function Bar option) dis-plays the Equipment Parameters screen with the following options.

21

Mod Points Button - provides a quick way to modify either point parameters or fault frequencies for a piece of equipment. For more information on modifying points see “Modify Points” on page 3-43.

Equipment Description: — can contain up to 28 characters and should be as descriptive and unique as possible.

Equipment ID: — can contain up to 10 characters and must be unique for each indi-vidual piece of equipment within the same area.

NoteThe Equipment ID code and the individual Measurement Point ID are combined to form a unique identification code for each measure-ment point displayed on Model 1010 and Model 21xx series equip-ment analyzers.

3-30 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 109: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Equipment Classification: — can contain up to 16 characters describing the classi-fication of this equipment. Use of this field is not mandatory and may be left blank, if desired.

Picture File: — identifies a picture file assigned to this equipment. You can display the file name and use the Assign Picture File function (under the File pulldown menu) to attach or change a diagram file. To un-assign a picture file from a piece of equipment, use the UnAssign Picture File option under the file menu.

Analysis Group ID No.: — An analysis group should contain pieces of equipment that have similar components and operational characteristics (resulting in similar vibration signatures). This provides another way to group pieces of equipment that have similar analysis criteria together.

Technologies . . . – On a new piece of equipment, adding a checkmark in these boxes allows you to select the available Technologies. On machines that have already been defined, this dialog box identifies the available technologies and dis-plays additional information about the Points that are defined. It also shows whether specific Technology Flags are turned off.

Equipment ParametersAccepting the Equipment Parameters dialog box displays the Equipment Parame-ters dialog box. The Periodic Tab has the following options.

22

3-31Periodic Technology

Page 110: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Equipment Type Code: select from No Speed/No Load, Con. Speed/Con. Load, Var. Speed/Con Load, Con. Speed/Var. Load, Var. Speed/Var. Load.

Enter Speed Only Once: — if the machine is specified as being a variable-speed type, this option affects the number of times that the machinery analyzer prompts the operator to enter the machine running speed.

When Selected – The operator is prompted only once, before the first measurement point, to enter the machine running speed.

When Not Selected – The operator is prompted to enter the machine running speed before each measurement point. This option is normally only used when the running speed could change during data collection on this machine.

Enter Load Only Once: — if the machine is specified as being a variable-load type, this option affects the number of times that the machinery analyzer prompts the operator to enter the machine load.

When Selected – The operator is prompted only once, before the first measurement point, to enter the machine load.

When Not Selected – The operator is prompted to enter the machine load before each measurement point. This option is normally only used when the load could change during data collection on this machine.

Speed Type Code: — specifies the units that will be used for the machine running speed. Select RPM for revolutions per minute or FPM for feet per minute (MPM if using metric).

FPM-To-RPM Factor: — This field specifies the variable that will be used to convert from FPM to RPM.

RPM = FPM x Factor

Factor can be calculated using the diameter (D in feet, inches, or meters - see following note) of the rolling element by:

23

3-32 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 111: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

For D in feet use:

24

Or, for D in inches use:

25

NoteThese examples are for an English database. If the database data is Metric, you must use meters for D.

Reference Speed: — the normal operating speed of the machine (entered in revo-lutions per minute). If the data is corrupted, DBASE will use Reference Speed as the normalizing frequency for order-type spectral plots.

Reference Load: — specified in percent, this is the normal operating load of the machine.

Fixed Tach Location? — this option can be used if a tachometer will be connected to measure RPM on a variable-speed machine with measurement points that run at different speeds. If only one location is accessible for placement of the tachom-eter, answer “Yes” to enable this feature.

When using Fixed Tach Location, the program will automatically calculate the run-ning speed for every measurement point based on the ratio of the reference RPM of the machine to the reference RPM of each measurement point. For more informa-tion about Fixed Tach Location, see “When and How to Use the Fixed Tach Location” on page 3-98.

3-33Periodic Technology

Page 112: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteThis option is functional only if the machine has been specified as variable speed.

Edit (Point) With a Point selected, clicking on Edit displays the Periodic Vib. Meas. Pnt. Param-eters screen. The Point Information Tab has the following options.

26

3-34 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 113: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Measurement Point ID: — This three-character ID identifies each measurement point and must be unique for each measurement point on the same piece of equip-ment. A consistent system should be devised and used. The first or last character of the ID can be used to indicate the orientation of the sensor (see following exam-ples).

Measurement Point Description: — can contain up to 32 characters to uniquely identify each measurement point. Use of this parameter is not mandatory and the description can be left blank (or shortened) to reduce equipment analyzer memory consumption.

Measurement Point ID Description

H01 Horizontal axis, first measurement point

V03 Vertical axis, third measurement point

A01 Axial axis, first measurement point

3-35Periodic Technology

Page 114: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Units Type Code: — defines the units that will be used for display and analysis of the collected data. The units may be the actual sensor output or the result of units con-verted from the sensor output (Vel <-- Acc, Disp <-- Acc, and Disp <-- Vel). The code descriptions are as follows:

Code Description

Acc <-- Acc Acceleration in Gs from an acceleration sensor

Vel <-- Acc Velocity in in/sec or mm/sec from an acceleration sensor

Vel <-- Vel Velocity in in/sec or mm/sec from a velocity sensor

Disp <-- Acc Displacement in mils or microns from an acceleration sensor

Disp <-- Vel Displacement in mils or microns from a velocity sensor

Disp <-- Disp Displacement in mils or microns from a displacement sensor

General Dynamic Dynamic signals in arbitrary units

Static/DC Input Static DC signals in arbitrary units

Keypad Input Keypad input in arbitrary units

Temperature Temperature in Degrees F or C

Sound Pressure Microphone signals in PASCALS (Sound Pressure)

NOTE: The following Units Type Codes are used primarily by MotorView

Current Used for electric current measurements in Amps

Flux/Low Freq For use with the flux coil. This should be used for low frequency, high resolution (3200 lines) flux analysis. Low frequency is defined in this instance as no more than the maximum of (2xLF)+5Hz or LF+(2xRPM)+5Hz.

Flux/Slot Pass For use with the flux coil. This type should be used for high frequency flux analysis. High frequency is defined in this instance as the larger of stator slot pass or rotor slot pass plus 400 Hz.

Shaft Voltage Used for shaft voltage measurements using the 348SP shaft probe in volts.

Shaft Current Used for shaft current measurements using the 348SP shaft probe in Amps.

3-36 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 115: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Units: - If Units Type Code has been specified as arbitrary units (General Dynamic, Static/DC Input, or Keypad Input) this eight-character field can be used to specify the units label that will be displayed on reports and plots. For all other code num-bers, this field is ignored.

RPM At Measurement Point: — specifies the equipment running speed (in RPM) at the specific location of this measurement point. On a piece of equipment with no gears, belts, or other transmission system, this value would normally be the same as the equipment running speed. However, this value may differ from point to point on a complex piece of equipment.

Monitoring Schedule (Days): — An effective predictive maintenance program requires regular, periodic data collection to be taken on the monitored piece of equipment. Enter the number of days (0.1 to 365.0) that will elapse between each data collection for this measurement point. For example, enter the number 30 for a monthly data collection schedule.

The EXPORT program will use these numbers to generate an exception report for any equipment and measurement points not meeting this schedule.

Number of Data Values In Statistical Calculations: — used in the early stages of set-ting up a database, in order to acquire data that will be used to generate statistical alarm limits (Bs) for this measurement point. The parameter entered in this field designates how many data collection sessions (1 to 1000) will be used to acquire these data. After this number of samples has been taken, the statistical alarm (Bs) will not change. Emerson recommends a minimum of six data values.

Clear Fault Frequency Setup: — When selected, resets all of the variables located on the fault frequency table to the “undefined” status. When not selected, retains the existing values and is useful when creating or modifying consecutive measurement points which use the same fault frequencies.

Analysis Parameter Set ID: — designates the analysis parameter set of this measure-ment point. Enter the number (0 through 512) that corresponds to the desired analysis parameter set. For measurement points that have been specified as DC-type signals (Static/DC Input, Keypad Input, and Temperature), enter a 0 for the set ID.

3-37Periodic Technology

Page 116: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Note

The View AP Sets or View AL Sets Function Bar buttons can be used to display the available sets for assignment for both Analysis Parame-ters and Alarm Limits (you do not have to have the cursor on these fields to activate these functions).

The displayed window provides a view of the currently defined set. Other sets can be viewed by using the Prev Set and Next Set com-mands. The displayed set can be automatically assigned to the mea-surement point with the Select Set command or the currently assigned set can be retained by using the No Change command.

Alarm Limit Set ID: — designates the alarm limit set that will be applied to the anal-ysis parameter set specified for this measurement point. Enter the number (0 through 512) that corresponds to the desired alarm limit set. Enter a 0 to bypass the alarm checking feature.

NoteFor measurement points that have been specified as DC-type signals in a database with few similar type signals, the recommended proce-dure is to enter the alarm limits on the second page of the measure-ment point window (enter a 0 for Alarm Limit Set ID). However, if there are many such DC-type signals within the same database, it is preferable to define an alarm limit set for these signals even though only the overall value will be used (this procedure is recommended for keypad and temperature readings as well).

NoteFor dynamic measurement point types, if 0 is entered for alarm limit set, then no alarming will be performed. Please note that in the routes, if these points are set to store spectra or waveform on high status, then these points will never store spectra and/or waveform.

3-38 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 117: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

The Sensor/Signal Info Tab has the following options.

27

Probe Type: — select casing or shaft.

Sensor Orientation: — available options are Unknown, Horizontal, Vertical, Axial, Radial, Radial-X, Radial-Y, and Tangential.

Sensor Position: — the options are Unknown, Inboard, Outboard, Housing, Foun-dation, and Pipe/Duct.

Provide Sensor Power? — Select to enable the sensor power supply on the equip-ment analyzer. Do NOT select for sensors that do not require power from the equipment ana-lyzer.

Sensor Sensitivity (V/EU): — the number of volts per engineering unit produced by the sensor that will be used to collect data for this measurement point. For example, the accelerometer supplied with the Model 1010 and Model 21xx series equipment analyzers has a sensitivity of 0.1 volts per G. Enter the appropriate value for the sensor being used. If you want to display the signal amplitude in volts, enter a value of 1.0.

3-39Periodic Technology

Page 118: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

DC Offset In Volts: — the voltage (VO) that is subtracted from the measured voltage reading on the input signal before the sensitivity (S) is applied in order to convert to engineering units (EU).

28

For example, if a 1 to 5 volt span on the input signal corresponds with values of 100 to 900 psi, the DC Offset should be entered as 0.5 volts and the sensor sensitivity as 5 mV/psi (0.005 V/psi).

NoteThe Tools/Calc. Sens and Tools/DC Off. selections provide simpli-fied calculators to determine both sensitivity and DC offset.

Signal Group/Channel Numbers: — specifies how measurement points are to be grouped. The reasons for grouping measurement points are as follows:

1·····Using a CSI triaxial sensor - When using a triaxial sensor to measure the three directions on a single location on the equipment, make sure the X signal is on a measurement point assigned channel 1, Y signal is on a measurement point assigned signal channel 2, and Z signal is on a measurement point assigned signal channel 3. These three measurement points should be given 1 group number. Another set of three measurement points on the same equipment also using a triaxial sensor should be given a different group number. Group numbers for this application are from 1 to 19.

2·····Using the CSI Mux adapter - When using the CSI Mux adapter, a set of up to 4 measurement points on an equipment could be group together. The measurement going into Mux channel 1 should be assigned channel number 1, and so on up to 4. Each group of measurement points should be given a different group number. Group numbers for this application are from 1 to 19.

3·····Using the dual channel feature of the CSI Model 2120 - When using the dual channel feature, 2 measurements on an equipment are group together. The reason for grouping measurement points are as follows:

3-40 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 119: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

a. Cross analysis of signals is desired

b. Orbit plots are desired

c. Normal and PeakVue measurement points taken simultaneously

d. Speed up route data collection by analyzing two signals simultaneously.

Assign signal channel 1 to the measurement point going into the first input channel of the analyzer and 2 to the measurement point going into the second input channel. Group numbers for this application are from 20 to 96.

Measurement is Set to (or Will Not) Auto-Range — this option is turned on/off by using the Turn Auto-Range On/Off button.

Plotting Full Scale Range: — only used above has been set to autorange. When used, this option determines how a data collector spectrum plot will be scaled. If above is set to not Auto-Range, then this field becomes the “Measurement Full Scale Range,” which determines what size signal will use the full scale range of the analog to digital converters in the data collectors.

Caution!Exercise care when using this option since an inappropriate value can seriously affect the quality of your data.

HFD Full Scale Range: — not used with CSI’s present family of 1010 and 21xx meters but retained for compatibility with some very early data collector models.

Lowest/Highest Valid Signal Level: — specifies limits (in engineering units) for the lowest and highest readings that are expected for this measurement point. Readings below or above these limits may indicate an equipment malfunction or incorrect measurement procedure. If you want to disable one or both of these limits, enter a 0 for that parameter.

Integration Mode Override: — select from None, Analog, or Digital.

Overall Mode Override: — select from None, Analog, Digital RMS, Digital True Peak and Digital Average Peak..

3-41Periodic Technology

Page 120: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Function Bar OptionFault Freq — displays the Fault Frequency Information dialog box that shows fault frequency information for this point.

Tools Pulldown Menu OptionCalc. Sens. + DC Off — If the Measurement Point is type Static/DC Input, selecting this option displays a dialog box that allows you to calculate the Sensitivity and DC Offset values.

New (Area)Selecting this Function Bar option displays the same Area Parameters screen that appears when Edit (Area) is selected. Refer to the Edit (Area) section for descrip-tions of the various field options.

New (Equipment)Selecting this Function Bar option displays the same Equipment Parameters screen that appears when Edit (Equipment) is selected. Refer to the Edit (Equipment) section for descriptions of the various field options.

New (Point)Selecting this Function Bar option displays the same two-tab screen that appears when Edit (Point) is selected. Refer to the Edit (Point) section for descriptions of the various field options.

CopySelecting this option displays the parameters dialog box for the item you have high-lighted (Area, Equipment, or Point). This allows you to change any of the values before copying the item and pasting it into another location.

Add BranchSelecting the Add Branch Function Bar option displays the parameters description screen immediately below the level selected (selected Area displays Equipment and selecting Equipment displays Point parameters). The values on these screens can be filled in as desired to define the branch being added.

SummaryDisplays a summary of the Area selected listing the Equipment ID, description, and number of points for each piece of equipment.

3-42 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 121: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

MoveRemoves the selected item (Area, Equipment, or Point) and allows you to use the Paste option to place the selected item in the highlighted target location.

DeleteBrings up a dialog box that lists the selected item and warns you about the item(s) that are being deleted.

Caution!Delete will permanently erase the selected information from the database. Once erased, the information cannot be retrieved. Use this feature with caution. Make sure a backup of the database exists.

Modify Points

The Modify Points Control Panel screen allows you to modify the point parameters or the fault frequencies (if applicable) for a piece of equipment. Each technology used on a piece of equipment will have a specific set of points and fault frequencies (if applicable). Click on the Mod Pt Params or Mod Fault Freq button next to the technology you want to modify.

29

3-43Periodic Technology

Page 122: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Modify Fault Frequencies - Fault frequencies can be defined for each individual measurement point. Alternately, up to 128 fault frequency sets can be separately defined and then assigned to each measurement point.

Up to seven individual fault frequency descriptions are available for each point. An individual entry may actually define one or more frequencies depending on the input type that has been selected.

NoteTwo different windows are provided for setting up fault frequencies: the Simple Mode and the Detail Mode. for more information, see “Fault Frequency Set Information (Periodic)” on page 3-70.

30

3-44 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 123: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Modify Vibration Point Parameters - This window lists the vibration measurement points that are assigned to a piece of equipment, and can be used to add, delete, and/or modify the measurement points.

31

3-45Periodic Technology

Page 124: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Modify Tribology Point Parameters - This window lists the Tribology measure-ment points that are assigned to a piece of equipment. For more information, see “Oil Technology” on page 3-100.

32

3-46 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 125: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Modify Thermography Point Parameters - This window lists the Thermography measurement points that are assigned to a piece of equipment. for more informa-tion, see “Thermography Technology” on page 3-128.

33

3-47Periodic Technology

Page 126: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Modify Ultrasonic Point Parameters - this window lists the Ultrasonic measure-ment points that are assigned to a piece of equipment. For more information, see “Ultrasonic Technology” on page 3-139.

34

3-48 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 127: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Analysis Parameter/Data Acquisition (Periodic)

Used to edit, add, or delete analysis parameter sets. When selected, the Select Peri-odic AP Set dialog box is displayed. Individual variables of an analysis parameter set are defined in the Analysis Parameter Set dialog box (see “Analysis Parameter Set” on page 3-59).

35

Add SetTo add a new analysis parameter set, click the Add Set command, and the program will advance to the Define Periodic Parameter Set window. Enter the new set number and click OK to advance to the three-tab Periodic Analysis Parameter Set window (see note). After accepting this dialog box, the Analysis Parameter Set (#) - (Name) dialog box is displayed. Make any desired changes and click OK to com-plete the process of adding a new set.

NoteSince the new set will be identical to the set highlighted, highlight the set closest to the desired set before executing the “Add Set”. You can then modify the fields as desired.

3-49Periodic Technology

Page 128: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Delete SetThe Delete Set command can be used to delete a highlighted Analysis Parameter Set from the database.

Edit SetTo modify an existing set, highlight the Parameter Set Description with the cursor, click the OK button, and the program will advance to the Periodic Analysis Param-eter Set dialog box.

Spectrum Parameters Tab

Periodic Analysis Parameter Set Dialog Box

Set Description: — can contain up to 32 characters that describe the analysis param-eter set.

Spectral Frequency Setup: — Select a frequency-based (Hz) analysis parameter set or an order-based analysis parameter set.

Low Frequency Signal Conditioning Limit (Hz): — defines the lowest frequency (in default frequency units) that will be used in overall signal and analysis parameter calculations; all frequencies less than this value are excluded from these calcula-tions. Enter the low frequency limit in Hertz or CPM, depending on the Default Frequency Units specified for this database.

3-50 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 129: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteFor CSI Models 1x, the spectral lines below this cutoff value may not be accurate in either the analyzer or in AMS Machinery Manager. These values will be incorrect if they are larger than the highest ampli-tude in the spectrum above the cutoff frequency. This is caused by the compression technique used when storing the spectrum. However, 2120 analyzers will be accurate, even for values below the low fre-quency cutoff level.

NoteWhen using an order-based parameter set, the analyzer multiplies the order value (specified for Upper/Lower Frequency For FFT Analysis) times the RPM that is entered during data collection. If this results in an upper frequency value that falls between available frequency selec-tions, the analyzer will default to the next higher selection for this value.

Lower Freq (Hz/Order): — For CSI analyzers such as the Model 2117/2120, this option is ignored.

3-51Periodic Technology

Page 130: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Number of Lines: — defines the number of lines (frequency samples) that span the frequency range in the FFT analysis. A larger figure for the number of lines will result in greater frequency resolution on a plot; however, this also increases the memory storage requirements and may require more time to take measurements. Frequency resolution of the FFT analysis is defined as the upper frequency divided by the number of lines. The available selections for Number of Frequency Lines in FFT Analysis are:

Number of Averages: — determines the number of data samples or averages that are collected by the equipment analyzer to perform the FFT calculation. Emerson recommends four to 10 averages for normal vibration measurement on rotating pieces of equipment. (Fewer number of averages may be used in areas with a low random noise level.)

NoteThe number of averages affects the total amount of time that will be required to take a measurement with the equipment analyzer–the greater the number of averages, the more time will be required.

Spectral Averaging Mode: — Select from the following averaging methods:

Normal Mode – the normal averaging mode for the equipment ana-lyzers. The power of each frequency line is summed and divided by the number of averages.

Model 2117 Model 2120 Model 2130

100 lines 100 lines 100 lines

200 lines 200 lines 200 lines

400 lines 400 lines 400 lines

800 lines 800 lines 800 lines

1600 lines 1600 lines 1600 lines

3200 lines 3200 lines 3200 lines

6400 lines 6400 lines

12,800 lines*

*single channel only

3-52 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 131: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Peak Hold – peak hold forms a composite spectra using the largest value that occurs for each line in all spectra to be averaged.

Synch. Time – (requires a tach signal) synchronous time average mode has the effect of sampling data at the same portion of each revolution of the piece of equipment. This makes the sampled RPM constant even when the equipment RPM drifts. An arithmetic average of the time data is first formed. The spectrum of this average time data is the synchro-nous time averaged spectrum. This averaging mode results in a spec-trum where peaks that are integer multiples of the running speed will remain while other peaks tend to be averaged down.

Order Track – (requires a tach signal) this mode collects time data as in the synchronous time averaging mode. However, each block of time data is converted to a frequency spectrum. The arithmetic average of these spectra is the order-tracked spectrum. This averaging mode results in a spectrum where peaks that are related to running speed will remain while other peaks tend to be averaged down.

Tach Trigger – In this mode, data is collected only when a tachometer pulse is present. Data acquisition starts at the beginning of a tach pulse.

Window Type: — (Uniform or Hanning) the Uniform choice does not apply a window to the sampled time data and is sometimes used for special applications. Hanning window is recommended for normal operation.

Spectral Weighting: — used for acoustic applications; filters the measured spectra to approximate the frequency response of the human ear. This parameter is normally not selected.

Perform 1/3 Octave Analysis?: — enables Third-Octave Analysis which is a method of measuring and displaying the signal amplitude in third-octave bands. This option is normally not selected.

Number of Analysis Parameters: — specifies the number of individual analysis parameters (0 to 12) that will be included in this analysis parameter set. When using Third-Octave Analysis, this variable is automatically set to zero (0).

3-53Periodic Technology

Page 132: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Caution!It is not good practice to change the analysis parameter set that has been assigned to a measurement point after data have been collected and stored for that point–trend data plots will exhibit unusual changes around the date that the alteration occurred. If the analysis parameter must be changed, it is recom-mended that the collected trend data be deleted from the database, and the asso-ciated statistical values be reset to zero, before making the change.

Signal Processing Parms Tab

36

SST Control: — Select if the data collector is a 2120 and you want to collect low fre-quency data — utilizes the internal hardware features to improve accuracy in low fre-quencies readings.

3-54 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 133: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Pre-process Signal?: — Select if PeakVue/Demodulation is to be turned on in the CSI Model 2120. .

Filter Setting: — To set the filter, press the space bar (or click on the arrow) and choose from the following:

Setting 2117 Analyzer 2120 Analyzer 2130 Analyzer

None Supported Supported Supported

500 Hz HP Supported Supported Supported

1000 Hz HP Supported Supported Supported

2000 Hz HP Supported Supported Supported

5000 Hz HP Supported Supported Supported

10000 Hz HP Maps to 5 kHz HP Supported Supported

20000 Hz HP Maps to 5 kHz HP Supported Supported

20 - 150 Hz BP Maps to 500 kHz HP Supported Supported

50 - 300 Hz BP Maps to 500 kHz HP Supported Supported

100 - 600 Hz BP Maps to 500 kHz HP Supported Supported

500 - 1000 Hz BP Maps to 1kHz HP Supp Supp

50 Hz Notch Supported * Errors on Rte Load Errors on Rte Load

60 Hz Notch Supported * Errors on Rte Load Errors on Rte Load

100 Hz LF Reject Supported * Errors on Rte Load Errors on Rte Load

* Only if the 750 Demodulator is attached.

3-55Periodic Technology

Page 134: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Waveform Parameters Tab

37

Obtain Special Time Waveform: — To change the default settings for acquiring the time waveform, select (place an “x” in the box) and then specify the following vari-ables:

Enable FMAX Calculator: – if you are unsure of the maximum fre-quency you need to calculate your waveform, use the FMAX calculator to determine the maximum frequency.

3-56 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 135: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Input values for the maximum frequency (in Hz or Orders), number of revolutions, and RPM at measurement point. Click the “Re-calculate” button to see how the changes impact the number of lines, delta-T and total time on the waveform. To keep these adjusted values, click on the “Use Adjusted Values” button. To return to the values on the Waveform Parameters Tab, click the “Ignore Calculator Session” button.

The Waveform Frequency Calculator uses the following formulas to determine results:

Maximum Frequency: – enter a new Fmax if the time waveform is to be sampled using a different Fmax.

Maximum Frequency Unit Type: – select from Spectra, Hz, or Orders.

3-57Periodic Technology

Page 136: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Data Units: – press the space bar (or click on the arrow) to display the following options. Choose the units the measurement sensor is using and enter the number corresponding to your choice. When Sensor Units is selected, the analyzer uses the native units of the sensor.

Number of Points: – Enter the number of time samples desired.

Trigger: – click on the arrow or press the spacebar to choose between None or Tach. Select Tach if the time waveform is to be sampled fol-lowing a tachometer trigger.

Sensor Units

Acceleration

Velocity

Displacement

3-58 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 137: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Analysis Parameter Set

Clicking the OK button on the Periodic Analysis Parameter Set window records the new or modified variables and advances to the Analysis Parameter Set dialog box (if the number of analysis parameters is not 0). If the number of analysis parameters has been set to 0, clicking the OK button returns you to the Select Analysis Param-eter Set window. The Set ID number of the current parameter set appears at the top of the screen for reference.

38

Description: — 14-character field that is used to describe and identify each indi-vidual analysis parameter.

3-59Periodic Technology

Page 138: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Parameter Units Type: — specifies the type of units that will be used for each indi-vidual analysis parameter (for vibration signals only). This feature can be used to set up the individual analysis parameter to use units that are different from the overall signal amplitude. Select the desired units type from the following table.

Special Note for Time Waveform ParametersCase #1: — No Special Time Waveform was specified in previous menu.

• DFLTU cannot be used because the units of the time waveform collected are dependent on the integration mode of the data collector. If DFLTU is allowed, the units of the time waveform parameter will become indetermi-nate.

• No time waveform parameters will be collected if the units specified do not match units of the time waveform acquired by the data collector. Therefore, ensure that the units match the following:

If you are using an accelerometer and the data collector is in Analog Integration, specify VELOC.

If you are using an accelerometer and the data collector is in Digital Integration, specify ACCEL.

• Emerson strongly recommends that a special time waveform be specified with the desired units selected (see Case #2).

Case #2: — Special Time Waveform was specified in previous menu.

• DFLTU will be the only unit type allowed and stored because it is the only unit type that will always be consistent with the specified special time wave-form. Although other unit types can (sometimes) be valid, they are not allowed because of the possibility of an inconsistent setup.

DFLTU Default units (units specified in “Units Type Code” at point definition)

VELOC Velocity (in/sec or mm/sec)

DISPL Displacement (mils or microns)

ACCEL Acceleration (Gs)

HFD U HFD (Gs)

3-60 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 139: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Type of Parameter: — determines the method used to calculate the trend data from the spectral information within each individual analysis parameter. Select the desired method:

Hz/CPM INT Signal amplitude over the interval between the lower and upper frequencies (specified in Hz/CPM).

ORD INT Signal amplitude over the interval between the lower and upper frequencies (specified in orders).

HFD Signal amplitude above 5 kHz. No lower or upper frequency need be specified.

Hz/CPM vHFD Variable high frequency detection band. This parameter is calculated from a high frequency spectrum over the interval (specified in Hz/CPM).

NxRPM - A NxRPM Amplitude (requires tach signal)

NxRPM - P NxRPM Phase (requires tach signal)

DC-GAP DC Gap Reading

DC-MEAS DC reading which also takes sensor sensitivity into account

MP Frq Maximum peak value in the frequency interval (specified in Hz or CPM)

MP Ord Maximum peak value in the frequency interval (specified in orders)

MP Wave Maximum waveform peak

P-P Wave Measurement between highest and lowest waveform peaks

Crest Waveform crest factor

NOTE: The following Types of Parameters apply to shaft probe measurements.

V-Peak Retrieves the peak voltage (often a result of spike voltages on the equipment shaft) from the (348SP) shaft probe only.

CUR2-DC The result of DC current taken across a 10 ohm resistor within the 348SP shaft probe only.

CUR2-AC The result of AC current taken across a 10 ohm resistor within the 348SP shaft probe only.

Fullband The overall of the measurement taken from 0 to 20 kHz at 3200 lines resolution.

3-61Periodic Technology

Page 140: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Lower Frequency: — Enter the lower limit of the band in frequency Hz (or CPM) or Orders, as selected in the spectral frequency set up. This value must be less than the value specified for Upper Frequency. For Type of Parameter selections five and six, this field is used to specify the value of N.

Upper Frequency: — Enter the upper limit of the band in frequency (Hz or CPM) or order. This value must be greater than the value specified for Lower Frequency. For Type of Parameter selections five and six, this field is used to specify the band-width (or 1/number of cycles).

NoteIf the Upper Frequency is 0.0 and the Lower Frequency is greater than 0.0, this band will be interpreted as the energy from the Lower Frequency to the maximum frequency of the spectrum (whatever that is).

Summary InformationThis function displays a report that lists the analysis parameters associated with the selected database. To access this function, select Summary Information from the Tools menu or press Ctrl-L.

39

3-62 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 141: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

The Listing Details Option screen provides the ability to customize the information listed in the report. Select the amount of detail desired for the report by high-lighting one of the three options.

40

Click either the OK button or the green check button, or press the Return key to generate the report.

Analysis Parameter Set Summary Information

3-63Periodic Technology

Page 142: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Alarm Limit/Data Evaluation (Periodic)

This option (on the Database Add/Edit Options dialog box) is used to edit, add, or delete alarm limit sets. After selecting this option, a list of the previously defined sets is displayed in the Select Periodic AL Set dialog box.

41

3-64 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 143: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Edit SetTo modify an existing set, highlight the Alarm Limit Description with the cursor, click the Edit Set command and the program will advance to the Periodic Alarm Limit Set dialog box.

42

Set Description: — can contain up to 32 characters that describe the alarm limit set.

Maximum Deviations (“B”): — The “Bs” early warning alarm is a level determined by multiplying the number of Maximum Deviations times the standard deviation and then adding the mean (average) value.

NoteWhen using a dual lower type of alarm, the Baseline Ratio is specified as a number with a value of less than one (<1.0).

3-65Periodic Technology

Page 144: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Units Code: — indicates the type of units that is used for the alarm levels of the overall signal level and each individual analysis parameter. The Units Code fields are for reference only–the overall alarm levels must be in the same units specified in the measurement point setup, and the analysis parameters must be in the same units specified in the analysis parameter setup.

Code Units

VELOC Velocity (IN/SEC or MM/SEC)

DISPL Displacement (MILS or MICRONS)

ACCEL Acceleration (G-s)

HFD High Frequency Detection Units (G-s)

DYNAM Dynamic Signal

STATC Static/Phase/Crest Factor

SOUND Sound Pressure Units (PASCALS)

TEMP Temperature (Degrees C or F)

CURNT Current

FLUX Flux

SFTVL Shaft Voltage

SFTCR Shaft Current

W-ACC Waveform Pk/P–P Acceleration

W-VEL Waveform Pk/P–P Velocity

W-DIS Waveform Pk/P–P Displacement

W-OTH Waveform Pk/P–P Other

3-66 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 145: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Alarm Type: — designates which alarm type code will be assigned to the overall signal level and to each individual analysis parameter. The seven alarm types are listed below.

Fault “D”: — For absolute alarm type codes, this specifies the measured value indi-cating that the piece of equipment has failed. Fault alarm values can usually be found in published standards for various types of equipment. For delta alarm type codes (positive numbers only), these are the changes from the baseline levels that represent equipment failure.

NoteIf the value entered here is 0.0, no alarm testing will be performed for this parameter, even if other entries (i.e., “C”...) are non-zero.

Alert “C”: — For absolute alarm type codes, this specifies the measured value indi-cating an approaching equipment failure. For delta alarm type codes (positive numbers only), these are the changes from baseline levels that indicate approaching failure. Alert values should be chosen so that once reached, there is sufficient time to plan for orderly repair of the equipment.

Weak Side “Lo/Hi”: — The weak side alarm provides protection against improper collection of data. For dual upper alarm type, this is the lowest level an equipment in good condition should exhibit. For dual lower alarm type, this is the highest level equipment in good condition should exhibit. The weak side value should corre-spond to a level where sensor readings are high/low enough to be valid, but not high/low enough to be a meaningful reading.

Alarm Type Codes

DU-A Dual Upper Level - Absolute

IW-A In-Window - Absolute

OW-A Out-of-Window - Absolute

DL-A Dual Lower Level - Absolute

DU-D Dual Upper Level - Delta

DL-D Dual Lower Level - Delta

DW-D Dual Out of Window - Delta

3-67Periodic Technology

Page 146: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Baseline Ratio “Br”: — A baseline value (the amplitude level within each individual analysis parameter) is recorded during the first actual measurement of each point. The “Br” early warning alarm is based on a level resulting from the Baseline Ratio times the baseline value within each individual analysis parameter.

Add Set To add a new alarm limit set, click the Add Set command, and the program will advance to the Define Periodic Alarm Limit Set dialog box.

NoteThe new set will be identical to the set highlighted. Therefore, high-light the set closest to the desired set before executing the “Add Set”. You can then modify the fields as desired.

Accepting the Define Periodic Alarm Limit Set dialog box will display the Periodic Alarm Limit Set dialog box. Modify the various fields as desired and click OK to complete the process of adding the new Alarm Limit set.

Delete Set The Delete Set command can be used to delete an Alarm Limit Set (selected with the highlighting cursor) from the database.

3-68 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 147: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Summary InformationThis function displays a report that lists the alarm limits associated with the selected database. To access this function, select Summary Information from the Tools menu or press Ctrl-L.

43

3-69Periodic Technology

Page 148: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Alarm Limit Set Summary Information Report

Fault Frequency Set Information (Periodic)

Fault frequencies can be defined for each individual measurement point. Alter-nately, up to 128 fault frequency sets can be separately defined and then assigned to each measurement point. The Fault Frequency Set Information option is used exclusively to Edit, Add, or Delete fault frequency sets.

Up to seven individual fault frequency descriptions are available for each set. An individual entry may actually define one or more frequencies depending on the input type that has been selected.

3-70 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 149: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteTwo different dialog boxes are provided for setting up fault frequen-cies: the Simple Mode and the Detail Mode. Most of the fault fre-quency types defined in one setup window can be transferred to the other setup window; however, the Simple Mode method cannot con-struct all of the types available using the Detail Mode method. Use the Simple/Detail Mode Function Bar option to toggle between the two dialog boxes.

Simple ModeSelect Fault Frequency Set Information from the RBM Database Management Functions dialog box. Then, from the Select Fault Frequency Set dialog box, select a fault frequency set and click OK. The Fault Frequency Set Information dialog box will be displayed

Simple Fault Frequency Set Information Dialog Box

Set Description: — up to 32 characters that identify this fault frequency set.

Fault Frequency Description — a 14 character, descriptive label that identifies each fault frequency entry.

3-71Periodic Technology

Page 150: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Type Frequency — specifies the type of frequencies that are defined in this entry. Select the desired input type (this is a Simple Mode listing):

Note1. SET is only available when defining fault frequencies in the Mea-surement Point setup. If a general fault frequency set is being defined, SET is not an option.

Code Description

XXX Undefined (no fault frequency defined for this line)

*** Simple Set (not available in Simple Mode)

NxRPM Multiplied Frequencies

RPM Turning Speed

BRG Bearing Frequencies

GEAR Gearing Frequencies (pre-calculated)

GBOX Gearbox Frequencies (pre-calculated)

HARM Harmonic Frequencies

BELT 1 Belt Frequencies (input is turning speed)

BELT 2 Belt Frequencies (output is turning speed)

FIX Fixed Frequency

MTRV Motor Vibration Frequency (electrically related motor faults found in vibration)

MTRC Motor Current Frequency (electrically related motor faults found in electric current measurements)

SET Previously Defined General Fault Frequency Set (see Note 1)

3-72 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 151: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Specific Element ID — This field is used to enter the ID number of a fault frequency set or component in the data file (gear, bearing, etc.) depending on the Type Fre-quency that has been selected.

Type Frequency

ID Numbers Description

NxRPM Any number This is the N of NxRPM. Multiplies the reference frequency to obtain the fault frequency. (see Note 2)

RPM (-2 to +48) Source of RPM used in calculations - descriptions are:-2 = any measurement point with a different RPM (-2 should not be used as the input for GBOX)-1 = equipment RPM0 = current measurement point+1 to +48 = measurement point number

BRG (1-30,000) Retrieves data from the bearing data set stored in the bearing file under this ID number.

GEAR (1-30,000) Recalls data from the gear data set stored in the gear file under this ID number.

GBOX (1-30,000) Recalls data from the gearbox data set stored in the gear file under this ID number.

HARM Any number The lowest harmonic of interest. (see Note 2)

BELT 1BELT 2

(1-30,000) Retrieves data from the belt data set stored in the belt file under this ID number (input.

FIX Any number This value is the fault frequency.

MTRVMTRC

(1-30,000) Retrieves fault frequency information from the motor data set stored in the motor file under this ID number.

SET (1-128) Refers to a general fault frequency set that has been previously defined in the database. (see Note 1 on previous page)

3-73Periodic Technology

Page 152: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Note2. If a Fault Frequency is set up in the Simple Mode, both HARM and NxRPM can only be set up to be harmonics of the running speed obtained from the current spectra. If harmonics of other frequencies are desired, this fault frequency must be set up in the Detailed Mode. Returning to the Simple Mode after defining a specific Reference Frequency in Detailed Mode is workable. However, the value of the Reference Frequency will be hidden.

NoteTo assign a fault frequency set to a measurement point, enter a description of the set into the Fault Frequency Description field, “Set” into the Type Frequency field and the set ID number into the Specific Element ID field.

CSI/User — CSI refers to the CSI component warehouse (for previous CSI users, this is the old BEARING, GEAR, BELT, MOTOR files). All these files are now com-bined into what is called the component warehouse. One CSI component ware-house and one user defined warehouse is associated with each AMS Machinery Manager database (there is only one CSI supplied warehouse). You can define as many user defined warehouses as you want but, only one can be associated with a partic-ular AMS Machinery Manager database. The association of the warehouses to the database is done while performing the GLOBAL setup in DBASE.

Number of Harmonics — specifies the number of harmonics (up to 12) of the fault frequency that will be represented on the spectral display and also listed on print-outs. (For BRG type, use a negative number of harmonics to indicate the inner race is fixed and the outer race is rotating.)

Simple Mode Function Bar CommandsDetail Mode — accesses the alternate Detail Mode dialog box that provides a more detailed method of setting up fault frequencies.

ID Search — If the Type is BRG, GEAR, GBOX, BELT1, BELT2, MTRV, or MTRC, after highlighting the specific element ID and clicking on this button, you can do a search of the component file for the ID of the bearing, gear, gearbox, etc.

Delete Freq — returns the highlighted entry line to the undefined state.

3-74 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 153: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Detail ModeSelect Fault Frequency Set Information from the RBM Database Management Functions dialog box. Then, from the Select Fault Frequency Set dialog box, select a fault frequency set and click OK. The Fault Frequency Set Information dialog box will be displayed.

Detailed Fault Frequency Set Information Dialog Box

Set Description: — use up to 32 characters to identify this fault frequency set.

Fault Frequency Description — a 14 character, descriptive label that identifies each fault frequency entry.

3-75Periodic Technology

Page 154: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Input Type — specifies the type of frequencies that are defined in this entry. Select the desired input type from the popup window (this is a Detail Mode menu):

NoteThis code is not available when defining a fault frequency set.

Reference Frequency — specifies the frequency that will be used as a reference when performing calculations. Enter a zero (0) to designate the current speed as the reference (when viewing a spectra, the current speed is the located RPM) or enter a fault frequency entry number (1 through 6) that has been previously defined (reference entry number must be less than the current entry number).

Code Description

XXX Undefined (no fault frequency defined for this line)

MUL Multiplied Frequencies

RPM Turning Speed

BRG Bearing Frequencies

GEAR Gearing Frequencies (pre-calculated)

GBOX Gearbox Frequencies (pre-calculated)

BELT Belt Frequency

HARM Harmonic Frequencies

MOD Modulated Frequencies

FIX Fixed Frequency

MTRV Motor Vibration Frequency (electrically related motor faults found in vibration)

MTRC Motor Current Frequency (electrically related motor faults found in electric current measurements)

ADD Added Frequencies

SET Fault Frequency Set (see Note)

3-76 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 155: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

The Reference Frequency also affects these four Input Types in the following manner:

Input Type Reference Frequency Function

MUL Multiplies the frequency designated by this number times the first modifier.

GBOX Identifies the reference frequency designated by this fault frequency line number. If, for example, this number referenced a fault frequency line that also contained a gearbox setup (GBOX or GEAR), it would identify the output frequency of that gearbox.

HARM Identifies the frequency designated by this number as the first or fundamental harmonic frequency.

MOD Identifies the frequency designated by this number as the fault (carrier) frequency which is being modulated (sideband frequencies surround it).

3-77Periodic Technology

Page 156: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Component /Set ID — This field performs different functions depending on the Input Type that has been specified.

Input Type

Component or Set ID

Description

BRG 1-1,000,000 Retrieves data from the bearing data set stored in the bearing file under this index number

RPM The source of the RPM used in calculations. Identities are as follows:

1-48 The ID of the measurement point

0 Current measurement point

-1 Equipment RPM

-2 Any measurement point with a different RPM (-2 should not be used as the input for GBOX)

GEAR 1-1,000,000 Recalls data from the gear data set stored in the gear file under this index number

GBOX 1-1,000,000 Recalls data from the gear data set stored in the gear file under this index number

MOD 0-6

Refers to a previously defined fault frequency entry in the same fault frequency set. The referenced entry represents the modulating frequency. In the fault frequency set shown at the beginning of this section, entry 6 shows an Input Type of MOD, which refers to entry 1 in the component ID as the modulating frequency. MOD requires that the modulating frequency is a previously defined entry, or if 0, the turning speed of the piece of equipment

BELT 1-1,000,000 Retrieves data from the belt data set stored in the belt file under this index number

ADD 0-6Specifies the line number (in the fault frequency list) containing the frequency used to be multiplied by the First Modifier, which is then added to (or subtracted from) to the Reference Frequency RPM to obtain the additive frequency

3-78 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 157: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

CSI/User — CSI refers to the CSI component warehouse (for previous CSI users, this is the old BEARING, GEAR, BELT, MOTOR files). All these files are now com-bined into what is called the component warehouse. One CSI component ware-house and one user defined warehouse is associated with each AMS Machinery Manager database (there is only one CSI supplied warehouse). You can define as many user defined warehouses as you want but, only one can be associated with a partic-ular AMS Machinery Manager database. The association of the warehouses to the database is done while performing the GLOBAL setup in DBASE.

First Modifier — The following table lists the First Modifier functions depending on the (FF) Input Type shown

.

Input Type First Modifier Function

MUL Uses the value specified in this field to multiply the reference frequency in order to obtain a desired fault frequency.

BRG For a bearing with only one race rotating (most common case), enter a zero (0.0). For a bearing with both races rotating, this entry specifies the ratio of the outer race speed to the inner race speed. Enter a positive ratio (>0.0) if both races are rotating in the same direction and negative (<0.0) if the races are rotating in opposite directions. A value of one (1.0) is invalid because this would imply that both races are moving at the same rotational speed and in the same direction.

MODTakes the value entered in this field to multiply the frequency designated in the Component Or Set ID field to attain the desired harmonic component of the modulation frequency. In most cases, this value is 1.0, but modulation frequencies do occasionally develop at multiples of a fundamental frequency.

HARM Uses the value in this field to define the lowest harmonic of interest.

GEAR This refers to the shaft number.

FIX Causes this entry to designate the fixed frequency of interest in Hz or CPM, depending on the definition of the global frequency units in the database.

ADD This entry is multiplied by the frequency on the fault frequency line specified by the Component/Set ID, which is then added (or subtracted) to the Reference Frequency RPM in order to obtain the additive frequency.

3-79Periodic Technology

Page 158: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Second Modifier — For most input types, this field defines the highest harmonic (multiplier) of interest. The program limits the total number of harmonics to 12. The effect according to the Input Type appears below.

Detail Mode Function Bar CommandsSimple Mode — allows you to switch to the Simple Mode dialog box menu.

ID Search — If the Type is BRG, GEAR, GBOX, BELT1, BELT2, MTRV, or MTRC, after highlighting the specific element ID and clicking on this button, you can do a search of the component file for the ID of the bearing, gear, gearbox, etc.

Input Type

Second Modifier Function

MUL Causes this entry to define the highest harmonic of the frequency calculated by multiplying reference frequency and the first modifier.

BRG Causes this entry to specify the number of harmonics of the bearing frequencies (FTF, BSF, BPFO, and BPFI) that are calculated and displayed. If negative, the absolute value specifies the number of harmonics; it also specifies that the outer race is rotating and the inner race is fixed.

GEAR Causes this entry to designate the number of harmonics of the gearmesh and shaft speed frequencies that are calculated and displayed.

GBOX Designates the number of harmonics of the gearbox frequencies.

HARM Causes this entry to represent the highest harmonic of interest.

FIX Causes this entry to determine the number of harmonics of the specified fixed frequency.

MOD Causes this entry to establish the number of sidebands of interest on each side of the reference frequency.

ADD The number of times the additive factor will be added to the Reference Frequency is as follows:

1st frequency = Ref. Freq + 1 x (Component/Set ID x 1st Modifier)2nd frequency = Ref. Freq + 2 x (Component/Set ID x 1st Modifier)nth frequency = Ref. Freq + nth x (Component/Set ID x 1st Modifier)

3-80 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 159: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Summary InformationThis function displays a report that lists the fault frequency sets associated with the selected database. To access this function, select Summary Information from the Tools menu or press Ctrl-L.

44

3-81Periodic Technology

Page 160: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Fault Frequency Set Summary Information Report

Notepad Observations (Periodic)

After selecting the Notepad Observations option, a list of generic and Periodic notes is displayed and can be downloaded into the equipment analyzer along with other Route information. While collecting data, these notes can be selectively assigned to a piece of equipment’s measurement points (up to 12 per piece of equipment) to record comments concerning the status of the piece of equipment. The assigned notepad observations are loaded into AMS Machinery Manager, along with the collected data, and can be accessed while using the PLOT-DATA and EXPORT programs. When a database is created, AMS Machinery Man-ager supplies a list of note codes that you can modify if desired.

3-82 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 161: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

The Notepad Observations list is used throughout the entire database–all areas and pieces of equipment access the same list. If routes from multiple databases are to be simultaneously downloaded into the analyzer, Emerson recommends that all files use the same notepad list.

45

Database Global Information (Periodic)

The Database Global Information option can be used to modify the global infor-mation that was specified during the creation of a new database. You can use the same two-tab sequence of dialog boxes that was used to Create a New File. Use the File pulldown menu (or Open Database icon) to display the Database Selection dialog box and select the database to be modified. Then, select Add/Edit Old Information/Database Global Information to bring up the following two-tab dialog box.

3-83Periodic Technology

Page 162: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

General Parms Tab

46

Company Name: — up to 32 characters can be entered in this field.

Default Frequency Units: — the units that will be used for entering and displaying frequency-related data. The selected units will also be used for the frequency axis of spectral displays, if not specified otherwise. Select Hz (cycles per second) or CPM (cycles per minute).

System For Data Units: — select either English or Metric as the standard for units that will be used to measure and display all data. Data units will be displayed as fol-lows:

Parameter English Metric

Acceleration G’s G’s

Velocity in/sec mm/sec

Displacement mils microns

Temperature degrees - F degrees - C

Sound Pressure Pascals Pascals

3-84 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 163: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Area, Equipment, and Load Keywords and Load Units: — These options enable you to globally substitute other descriptive names in place of Area, Equipment, Load, and Load Units throughout the AMS Machinery Manager programs while using this database. For example, using the word Floor might be more descriptive than Area or using the word Flow instead of Load.

Load Units is normally defined as a percentage of full load–defining the opera-tional state of the piece of equipment at the time data were collected. Another word may also be substituted for this description, for example, GPM would be more descriptive when using Flow as the Load keyword.

Caution!Emerson recommends that you do not use a keyword to replace a keyword. For example, Equipment should not be substituted for Area.

Percent of Fault Limit For Baseline Override: — establishes minimum baseline/mean values, as a percentage of each fault level (usually 10 percent), that will be used when determining early warning (Br and Bs) alarm levels. This percentage of the fault level will be substituted for the baseline if the actual baseline is less than this value. Enter a zero (0) to disable this feature.

Corrective Params Tab

47

3-85Periodic Technology

Page 164: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Maximum Analyze Data Duration (Days): – enter the maximum number of days you want to analyze the data.

Standard Electrical Line Frequency: — enter the AC line frequency at which you are operating — normal U. S. line frequency is 60 Hz.

Foot Pre-Check Method: — Soft Foot or Frame Distortion Index.

Load Balance Trim Runs? — click on the box to add a checkmark if you want to load balance your trim runs.

Measure of Power Quality: — select either DIN=Distortion Index or THD=Total Harmonic Distortion.

Function Bar Optionsdb Reference — displays the Database Global Parameters dialog box. The first column allows you to select the appropriate Unit Mode for each variable. The “dB Reference” column is used to specify the reference value that will equal 0 dB when using a decibel display for each data unit. To change from the standard default values, enter the new value in the appropriate field.

Comp Files — displays the Database Global Parameters dialog box. From this window, you can browse and select filenames for the Associated RBMview Data-base, External Envelope, User Supplied Component Warehouse, Transient Data Storage, Thermographic/UltraSonic Framework, and Image File Storage File-names and Pathnames.

3-86 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 165: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Notes, Examples, and Tutorials

The following sections contain examples and additional descriptive information that should help you better understand how to use some of the DBASE features. Although this material should be very helpful, some of the information will only be appropriate for specific technology(s).

Alarm Limit Notes

• Be sure the Alarm Limit Set and the Analysis Parameter Set go together when defining each Measurement Point Information window. Continually evaluate the success of the signal parameters and the alarm limits as you scan data. If EXPORT repeatedly overlooks faults, revise the analysis parameter and alarm limit sets. In addition, always review these sets whenever your company overhauls, completely replaces, or changes the normal operation of any monitored pieces of equipment.

• Modify Alarm Limit Sets with care. Many different measurement points and pieces of equipment may use each set. Any change that you make to one set affects all measurement points that use that set. Make a new set for a piece of equipment whose service has been modified.

• If no alarm checking is desired for dynamic sensors, use Alarm Limit Set zero (0). If no alarm checking is desired for certain analysis parameters, then enter a value of zero for the fault value. If an alarm limit is not desired, enter zero for that particular limit. (If zero is an invalid value in your appli-cation, then substitute a number close to zero, such as 0.001.)

• For users with multiple database files, Emerson recommends that all files use the same alarm limit and parameter sets, to use unique set ID numbers for each database, or to only download routes from the same database for each collection survey. The use of sets with the same ID number but dif-ferent definitions can produce unexpected results if both are loaded into an equipment analyzer at the same time (see note).

NoteIf your data collectors have Database Name Support turned on, this will not cause a problem.

3-87Notes, Examples, and Tutorials

Page 166: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

• Design your Alarm Limit Sets so that the early warning, alert, and fault limits increase numerically for upper alarm types and decrease numerically for lower alarm types. AMS Machinery Manager does not force any relative rela-tionship between these limits. The B alarm code, however, could never occur if the early warning limit exceeds the alert or fault limits as more severe alarms would have taken precedence. Alarm checking starts at the highest alarm type and stops as soon as an alarm has been generated.

Decide how many measurements you need to calculate the standard deviation. Enter that amount for Number of Data Values in Statistical Calculations on the Measurement Point Definition window. A large standard deviation occurs when the measurements are quite different. Measurements that have little difference, however, produce a small standard deviation. AMS Machinery Manager adds the mean (average) value to a multiple of the calculated standard deviation. The mul-tiple is defined by the Maximum Deviation in the Alarm Limit Set. This calculated value is then compared to the observed value of the signal parameter. The accuracy of this common statistical technique of highlighting unusual data depend on:

• the number of data points used to define the sample;

• the duration of time involved in the collection of the sample;

• the variance of the sample.

An alarm caused by this analysis method may prove insignificant with a small stan-dard deviation. The larger the sample, the more accurate the standard deviation and the mean. You can calculate a standard deviation only after you collect enough measurements. A number of measurements collected over an interval of several months may more accurately represent equipment operation than collection over a period of a few weeks.

3-88 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 167: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Fault Frequency Notes

Fault frequency sets prove to be an enormous asset in analysis of spectral plots. The guidelines below are intended to make fault frequency sets easier to develop.

• Establish some good general fault frequency sets. Define some basic, gen-eral fault frequency sets that you can use throughout the database. Use of these generalized sets helps you gain insight so that you can define and use more complex sets for special circumstances.

• Check frequency specifications. You can easily make mistakes when you define fault frequency sets. Check the calculations and frequencies that you specify for each entry. The program only displays the fault frequencies that have been provided in each set. Therefore, if the plot labels and/or fre-quency locations appear incorrect, take the defined parameters in the set and manually calculate the fault frequencies to verify the input. You may obtain a list of the specified fault frequency values under the Print option in the Database Management commands window.

Detail Mode Fault Frequency Set Examples

The following highlights each fault frequency Input Type with practical guidelines as to how each one may be implemented in a fault frequency set.

Multiplied Frequency (MUL): — Many types of equipment problems appear as one or more multiples of the equipment turning speed on a spectral plot. Misalign-ment frequently manifests at twice the turning speed. Looseness shows harmonic peaks of the turning speed, and many times, just the odd-numbered harmonic peaks appear at 1xT.S., 3xT.S., 5xT.S., etc. Vane or blade pass frequencies are gen-erated at a frequency equal to the number of blades multiplied by the turning speed.

The MUL Input Type requires the definition of the following items on the Fault Frequency Definition menu:

• a Reference Frequency, which is 0 for equipment speed or 1 to 6 for a previ-ously defined Fault Frequency Description on the same definition menu;

• the First Modifier, which is 1.0 only if the Reference Frequency is desired, any other positive number to reflect harmonic or subharmonic frequencies of interest;

3-89Notes, Examples, and Tutorials

Page 168: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

• and the Second Modifier, which has 1.0 as the default, may define har-monics of the multiplied frequency if the input is greater than 1.0. The com-ponent or set ID is not used for this input type and can be set to 0.

In the example below for a running speed of 10 Hz, the loose belt fault frequencies that are generated are 16.5, 33, and 49.5 Hz, and the calculated vane pass frequency and its harmonics are 50, 100, 150 and 200 Hz.

Bearing Frequencies (BRG): — Four basic bearing frequencies are available: the fundamental train frequency (FTF), the ball spin frequency (BSF), the ball pass outer race frequency (BPFO), and the ball pass inner race frequency (BPFI). When you select the BRG Input Type, all four of these frequencies are extracted from the bearing data set. To obtain additional harmonics at these frequencies (except the FTF), input the highest desired harmonic in the Second Modifier. Har-monics of the FTF are not calculated, because bearing faults are rarely (if ever) cor-rectly observed at multiples of this frequency. Bearing faults generally manifest as difference frequencies.

The BRG Input Type requires the definition of the following items on the Fault Fre-quency Definition menu:

• a Reference Frequency, which is a zero (0) to designate the current speed as the reference (when viewing a spectra, the current speed is the located RPM) or enter a fault frequency entry number (1 through 6) that has been a previously defined Fault Frequency Description on the same definition menu(reference entry number must be less than the current entry number).

• the Component or Set ID specifies the entry number from the bearing file to get the bearing frequencies

Fault Frequency

Input Type

Reference Frequency

Component or Set ID

First Modifier

Second Modifier

1 LOOSE V-BELT

MUL 0 0 1.650 3.000

2 VANE PASS MUL 0 0 5.000 4.000

Fault Frequency

Input Type

Reference Frequency

Component or Set ID

First Modifier

Second Modifier

1 TIMKEN S-745

BRG 0 1006 0.000 4.000

3-90 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 169: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

• the Second Modifier specifies the number of harmonics for all bearing fre-quencies (except FTF)

In the previous example, the Timken S-745 bearing file number 1006 has four fre-quencies which are extracted for the fault frequency set: FTF (.427), BSF (3.271), BPFO (7.677), and BPFI (10.323). The reference frequency is the equipment turning speed (using the previous example of 10 Hz), and the Component or Set ID is input as 1006. First modifier is now the ratio of the outer race speed to the inner race speed for a bearing with both races rotating., but the Second Modifier of 4.0 indicates that the first, second, third, and fourth harmonics are the desired fault frequencies for this entry. Therefore, this example generates the fault fre-quencies (in Hz) below:

Revolutions Per Minute (RPM): — Defines the Driver RPM, a specific point RPM, or the RPM of all other points on the piece of equipment which are different from the current point displayed.

Gearing Frequencies (GEAR): — The gearmesh frequency and the output shaft speed are the two basic gearing frequencies available. The gear data file has many more calculated frequencies available to the analyst, but the two mentioned here are the only ones retained for fault frequency sets. Specify up to 12 additional har-monics in GEAR by using the Second Modifier. Unlike BRG, GEAR requires that you specify a First Modifier, which refers to the shaft number.

1st-4th Harmonics FTF BSF BPFO BPFI

1xRPM x BRG Harmonics 4.27 32.71 76.77 103.23

2xRPM x BRG frequencies - 65.42 153.54 206.46

3xPRM x BRG Frequencies - 98.13 230.31 309.69

4xRPM x BRG frequencies - 130.84 307.08 412.96

Fault Frequency Input Type

Reference Frequency

Component or Set ID

First Modifier

Second Modifier

1 Gear ASM 1486 Gear 0 1486 1.00 3.000

3-91Notes, Examples, and Tutorials

Page 170: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

In the GEAR example above, gear file number 1486 has two frequencies extracted for the fault frequency set: the gearmesh (21.00) and the output shaft (.318). These numbers are multiplied by the turning (reference) speed of 10 Hz, because the First Modifier of 1 designates the reference frequency as the speed of the driving gear. The Second Modifier of 3 signifies that the first three harmonics are desired for fault frequency analysis. Therefore, this example generates the fault frequencies (in Hz) below:

Gearbox Frequencies (GBOX): — Defines the expected frequencies generated by any gearset or bearing defined in the gearbox. For Simple gears, this includes four frequencies for each gearset. They are: (1) tooth repeat (2) assembly phase if dif-ferent from gearmesh (3) gearmesh and (5) speed of the output shaft. For Epicy-clic gearboxes, this includes nine frequencies for each stage (see “Outputs of Fault Frequencies” on page 3-97 for complete descriptions).

In order to properly use the GBOX type Fault Frequency, you must specify, on another fault frequency line, the equipment speed (this is assuming a driver/gearbox setup where the Equipment speed defines the driver speed and the gearbox is directly driven by the driver). Typically, Emerson recommends that you define the first fault frequency line as the equipment speed using “RPM” as the frequency type. After this is done, the second line should define the “GBOX” type frequency and use the first fault fre-quency line as its reference speed.

In the above example, line two is using the frequency established in line one, Equip-ment speed (RPM type frequency using -1 as the Set ID) as its reference speed. Each remaining gearbox point will use the same Fault Frequency setup, regardless of the point speed.

1st - 3rd Harmonic Gearmesh Output Speed

(1xRPM x GEAR frequencies) 210.00 3.18

(2xRPM x GEAR frequencies) 420.00 6.36

(3xRPM x GEAR frequencies) 630.00 9.54

Fault FrequencyDescription

Input Type

Reference Frequency

Component or Set ID

First Modifier

Second Modifier

Mach RPM Refer RPM 0 -1 1.0 1.0

GBox F Frequ GBOX 1 4013 1.0 3.0

3-92 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 171: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Harmonic Frequencies (HARM): — This Input Type enables you to define har-monic fault frequencies. HARM assigns one label to all of the harmonics specified. To differentiate between the harmonics related to misalignment, looseness, or vane pass, simply define specific harmonics, label them with an associated fault, and enter them separately. To use HARM, enter a reference frequency (0 designates equipment speed), the lowest harmonic as the First Modifier, and the highest har-monic as the Second Modifier. The Component or Set ID field is unused.

In the example above, the first six harmonics of the equipment running speed define the fault frequencies. The program does not accept any higher harmonic than 12. If the running speed is 10 Hz, then the fault frequencies generated by this example are 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, and 60 Hz.

Modulated Frequencies (MOD): — This Input Type requires entries in all four cat-egories of the fault frequency set. The entry under Reference Frequency refers to the frequency you want to have modulated by another frequency. Enter a number (1 to 6) for Reference Frequency which refers to a fault frequency already defined on the current menu. Or use zero if the equipment turning speed is the desired ref-erence frequency from the spectra or waveform under consideration. The number (1 to 6) under Component or Set ID also refers to a fault frequency already defined on the current menu. This frequency is multiplied by the First Modifier to yield the modulating frequency. The default value is 1.0. The Second Modifier defines the number of sidebands reported on each side of the Reference Frequency.

Fault Frequency Input Type

Reference Frequency

Component or Set ID

First Modifier

Second Modifier

1 1xRPM Harmonics

HARM 0 0 1.000 6.000

3-93Notes, Examples, and Tutorials

Page 172: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

The example below identifies two fault frequencies that may indicate irregular equipment performance. For Suspect Freq., the First Modifier calculates a fre-quency at four times the equipment turning speed (for example, 4 x 10 Hz = 40 Hz). The Second Modifier signifies that only the first harmonic of this fault fre-quency is needed. Mod. Frequency has a Reference Frequency of 1. This line of the menu, therefore, refers to Suspect Frequency for its reference frequency. Compo-nent or Set ID is 0 which means that the equipment speed is multiplied by the First Modifier. First Modifier in turn signifies that this frequency is modulated by half of the equipment running speed. The modulation frequency is 5 Hz (10 Hz x 0.5). As determined by the Second Modifier, two sidebands of 5 Hz each appear on each side of the 40 Hz reference frequency. The total number of frequencies generated by the MOD input type equals two times the number of sidebands requested (Second Modifier). Therefore, the fault frequencies generated by this example are:

Modulated Frequency = 40 Hz

Sideband Frequencies = 30, 35, 45, and 50 Hz

Fixed Frequencies (FIX): — This fault frequency Input Type proves the easiest to use. You only need to specify one parameter–the First Modifier–after you select FIX for the Input Type. You may also reference this entry with other input types. Use the Second Modifier, if desired, to define the number of harmonics of the fixed frequency that is displayed. The Reference Frequency and the Component or Set ID fields are not used for the FIX Input Type.

The example shown above specifies the frequency of interest in the First Modifier. Use units of Hz or CPM, depending on how the measurement point units are established in the database.

Fault Frequency Input Type

Reference Frequency

Component or Set ID

First Modifier

Second Modifier

1 SUSPECT FREQ. MUL 0 0 4.000 1.000

2 MOD. FREQ. MOD 1 0 0.500 2.000

Fault Frequency Input Type

Reference Frequency

Component or Set ID

First Modifier

Second Modifier

1 CONTAM. FREQ. 1

FIX 0 0 79.80 0.0

2 CONTAM. FREQ. 2

FIX 0 0 140.00 3.000

3-94 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 173: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Fault Frequency Set (SET): — If you want a general fault frequency set, use SET for Input Type. Designate SET only when you define fault frequencies on the second page of the Measurement Point Information menu. You cannot reference this Input Type when you define general fault frequency sets. SET requires you to enter the number of the desired fault frequency set in the Component or Set ID field to extract all the frequencies generated by the fault frequency set. The set number you specify must refer to a general fault frequency set already defined in the database. The specified reference frequency becomes the 0 Reference Frequency for this general set. In the example below, SET recalls the frequencies calculated in general fault frequency set number 97. The total number of frequencies generated by a SET Input Type is dependent on the Component or Set ID definition. The SET Input Type does not use the First or Second modifier.

Belt Frequencies (BELT): — The belt fault frequencies are extracted from the belt file that you have created and stored using the FRQCAL program of AMS Machinery Manager. Although there are many belt-related frequencies stored in a belt file, only two frequencies (and their harmonics) are extracted for the fault fre-quency set: the belt traveling frequency and the other pulley (or sheave) frequency. You may enter the FRQCAL program and use the RECALL function key to obtain the values stored in the belt data set. The values listed are multiplied by the refer-ence frequency (the reference pulley or sheave speed) in order to obtain the actual fault frequencies. For example, to obtain the first three harmonics of the belt fre-quencies stored in file number 91 for the belt type SKF 1276, you would enter the following information:

Fault Frequency Input Type

Reference Frequency

Component or Set ID

First Modifier

Second Modifier

1 CONTAM. FREQ. 1

SET 0 97 0.0 0.0

Fault Frequency Input Type

Reference Frequency

Component or Set ID

First Modifier

Second Modifier

1 SKF 1276 BELT 0 91 1.000 3.000

3-95Notes, Examples, and Tutorials

Page 174: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

All of the input fields are used for BELT, but like GEAR, the First Modifier is not used as a multiplier but rather to indicate a directional sequence. A First Modifier of 1 directs the program calculations to use the reference frequency as the speed of the input sheave. A First Modifier of 2 directs the program calculations to use the reference frequency as the speed of the driven or output sheave. This directional sequence must correlate with the way the belt data file is defined. The total number of frequencies generated by the BELT Input Type equals two times the number of harmonics requested (Second Modifier).

Added Frequencies (ADD): — This fault frequency set multiplies the First Modifier by the frequency or the Fault Frequency entry specified by the Component or Set ID. Explanations appear below the table.

The number of times the additive factor will be added to the Reference Frequency is as follows:

1st frequency = Ref. Freq + 1 x (Component/Set ID x 1st Modifier)

2nd frequency = Ref. Freq + 2 x (Component/Set ID x 1st Modifier)

nth frequency = Ref. Freq + nth x (Component/Set ID x 1st Modifier)

With a turning speed of 10 (based on a Reference Frequency of “0” and an RPM at the measurement point and equipment speed of 10 Hz), fault frequency lines will be displayed at 220, 430, and 640 Hz. Calculations are as follows:

1st Frequency: (1.5 x 140) + 10 = 220

2nd Frequency: 2 x (1.5 x 140) + 10 = 430

3rd Frequency: 3 x (1.5 x 140) + 10 = 640

Fault Frequency Input Type

Reference Frequency

Component or Set ID

First Modifier

Second Modifier

1 FIX FIX 0 0 140 2.0

2 ADD ADD 0 1 1.5 3.0 (nth)

3-96 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 175: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Undefined (XXX): — You do not have to use all of the entries allocated in a fault frequency set. For those entries that are not used, specify XXX as the Input Type. This directs the software to ignore the particular entry. An example of the unde-fined input type appears below.

Simple Mode (***): — The Simple Mode method cannot construct all of the fault frequency types that are available when using the Detail Set method. If *** is spec-ified as the Input Type, it means that there is a detailed fault frequency set assigned that cannot be represented in the Reference Frequency, Component or Set ID, or First/Second Modifier fields.

Outputs of Fault Frequencies

Fault Frequency outputs for the types listed are shown in this table.

Fault Frequency

Input Type

Reference Frequency

Component or Set ID

First Modifier

Second Modifier

1 UNDEFINED XXX 0 0 0.0 0.0

Type Output

Bearing FF FTF, BSF, BPFO and BPFI

Belt FF Speed 1 in, speed 2 out, and Belt Frequency

Motor FF (for MTRV)

Slip Freq, Slip x Poles, Slip Sidebands (3), 2 x Line Freq, Rotor Bar Pass (# rotorbars x speed), Slot Pass (# slots x speed), Rotor Bar + 2 x Line Freq (5 sidebands), and Slot + 2 x Line Freq (5 sidebands)

Motor FF (for MTRC)

Slip Freq, Slip x Poles, Slip Sidebands (3), Line Freq, Rotor Bar Pass (# rotorbars x speed + line frequency), Slot Pass (# slots x speed), Rotor Bar + 2 x Line Freq (5 sidebands), and Slot + 2 x Line Freq (5 sidebands)

Gear FF (Simple Gear)

Failure frequencies for a gear set (between 2 specified shafts):Gear Mesh, Assembly Phase, Tooth Repetition, Speed driven shaft. Gear Mesh Sidebands +/– Speed of shaft 1 (5 sidebands), and Gear Mesh Side Bands +/– Speed of shaft 2 (5 sidebands)

Planetary Gear (for Stage n)

Frequency Sun, Frequency Planet, Frequency Ring, Frequency Carrier, Gear Mesh, Assembly phase - sun/planet, Tooth repetition-sun/planet, Assembly planet/ring, Tooth repetition - planet/ring, Defect frequency-sun, Defect frequency - planet,and Defect frequency - ring

3-97Notes, Examples, and Tutorials

Page 176: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

When and How to Use the Fixed Tach Location

An easy way to remember how to set up Equipment/Measurement Points using the Fixed Tach Location feature is to remember this rule: The speed measured by the data collector will be referred to as the “Equipment Speed”.

Example 1:You have a variable speed motor turning a fan. The motor is connected to the fan through a gear. The only place you can place the tach is on one of the fan blades. Assume that the gear is a step down gear so that the fan turns at a tenth of the motor running speed.

In the Equipment Definition Screen, set up the following:

Equipment Type Code: It must be a Variable Speed Equipment. Load can be either fixed or variable.

Enter Speed Only Once: Select this option if equipment speed does not change during the time it takes to acquire data for all the measurement points on that piece of equipment. Do not select if equip-ment speed changes during this time.

Reference RPM: 200.0 (This number is arbitrary. The only important values are the ratios of the equip-ment speeds to measurement point speeds.)

Fixed Tach Location: Select this option.

In the Measurement Point Definition Screen, set up the following:

Reference RPM of Fan Points: 200.0 (Remember, we are taching the fan, therefore, the “Equipment Speed” will be the speed measured at the fan points. The ratio of the Equipment Speed to Measurement Point Speed should be 1:1).

Reference RPM of Motor Points: 2000.0 (Remember, we are taching the fan, therefore, the “Equipment Speed” will be 10 times slower than the motor point speeds. The ratio of the Equipment Speed to Mea-surement Point Speed should be 1:10).

3-98 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 177: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Example 2:The piece of equipment is the same as above except that the tach signal is actually a displacement probe signal sensing the gear teeth of the gear attached to the motor shaft. Just for discussion sake, let us assume that gear has 30 teeth and the mating gear has 300 teeth. Therefore, we will be getting 30 pulses per revolution of the motor.

In the Equipment Definition screen, set up the following:

Reference RPM: 3000.0 (Again, this is arbitrary)

In the Measurement Point Definition screen, set up the following:

Reference RPM of Motor Points: 100.0 (Remember, we are measuring speed at a location that is going to give a “Equip-ment Speed” that is 30 times the motor speed. The ratio of the Equipment Speed to Measurement Point Speed should be 30:1).

Reference RPM of Fan Points: 10.0 (Remember, we are measuring speed at a location that is going to give a “Equipment Speed” that is 300 times the fan speed. The ratio of the Equip-ment Speed to Measurement Point Speed should be 300:1).

3-99Notes, Examples, and Tutorials

Page 178: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Oil Technology

This section describes Oil Technology dialog boxes.

Edit (Area)From the ADD/EDIT Database Tree Structure dialog box, with an Area selected, clicking on Edit (Function Bar option) displays the Area Parameters dialog box.

48

These functions are described in “Edit (Area)” on page 3-29.

3-100 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 179: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Edit (Equipment)With a piece of Equipment selected, clicking on Edit (Function Bar option) dis-plays the Equipment Parameters screen with the following options.

49

These functions are described in “Edit (Equipment)” on page 3-30.

Edit (Point) With a Point selected, clicking on Edit displays the nine-tab Oil Measurement Point Parameters dialog box.

3-101Oil Technology

Page 180: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

General Tab

50

Point ID: — The three-character ID identifies each measurement point and must be unique for each measurement point on the same piece of equipment.

A consistent system should be devised and used for identifying the measurement points of all pieces of equipment. Frequently, measurement points are numbered beginning from a standard location. The following examples illustrate typical naming conventions:

Description: — can contain up to 32 characters to uniquely identify each measure-ment point. Use of this parameter is not mandatory and the description can be left blank (or shortened) to reduce equipment analyzer memory consumption.

Unit ID for CSI Lab: — used for the import of data from an oil lab and must be unique across all customer databases. This string identifies an oil sample when it is sent to the lab and tags the data coming back.

Measurement Point ID Description

OC1 Oil compartment or oil sump, first point

OP1 Oil point, first in line from oil compartment

DR1 Oil point at drain from oil system

3-102 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 181: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteInstead of using this ID, CSI oil lab customers are encouraged to use the “Unique Sample ID” displayed on the oilview data grid.

Customer ID: — for future use — will be assigned by the CSI oil lab.

Database ID: — indicates the RBM database where the information is stored.

Unit ID for Other Lab: — used for the import of data from an oil lab. This string identifies an oil sample when it is sent to the lab and tags the data coming back.

Equipment Type — click on the Select From Equipment List button to display the available oil equipment types.

Oil Equipment Type: – see Equipment Type description.

Analysis Parameter Set ID: — click on the View Available AP Sets button to display the description of the selected set.

Alarm Limit Set ID: — click on the View Available AL Sets button to display the description of the selected set.

Equip Tab

51

3-103Oil Technology

Page 182: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Sampling Interval — number of units between each sample.

Criticality — Critical, Important, Moderate, Slight, or Non-Critical

Units: — Unknown, Minutes, Hours, Days, or Months.

Target Cleanliness

ISO 2/5/15 – the Target Cleanliness Level (TCL) for an oil circuit is the level to which it should be filtered to ensure long machine life.

Statistics

Number of Averages: – this is the number of measurements used to estab-lish the mean and standard deviation values for statistical trends.

Display Filter Tab

52

Click to add a check mark and select any of following options:

Mini Lab Tests

5100 Analyzer

5100 Digital Viscometer

51FW Ferrous Wear

3-104 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 183: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Reserved

51PC Particle Counter

All Other Tests

Spectrometer

Viscosity

Water Tests (Ken Fisher or other method)

WDA Wear Debris (Micropatch, or other Wear Debris Analysis method)

FTIR (Fourier Transform Infrared chemical analysis)

TAN (Total Acid Number)

TBN (Total Base Number)

Ferrography (Analytical Ferrography - Wear Debris Analysis - using glass slides and microscope analysis)

Particle Counting (Lab measured particle counting)

Transformer (Oil analysis for transformer and oil filled circuit breakers)

Other Tests (User Defined)

Special Tests (User Defined)

3-105Oil Technology

Page 184: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Internal Tab

53

Oil Pressure — Low, Medium, High, or Unknown

Oil Change — Never, On Condition, Calendar, Usage, Other, or Unknown

Coolant — None, Glycol, Water, Other, or Unknown

Separator — None, Water Bleed, Other, or Unknown

Filter Category — None, <10 microns, 10—40 microns, Centrifugal, Other, or Unknown

Actual

Size (Microns): – normal filter rating in microns

Beta Ratio: proportion of particles greater than normal filter size removed in single pass through the filter

Oil Temperature — Low, <15OF (65C), >15OF (65C), or Unknown

Oil Capacity Estimate — >1000 gal, 100—1000 gal, 20—100 gal, or <20 gal

Actual — actual oil capacity

3-106 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 185: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Units — Unknown, Gallons (UK), Gallons (US), Quarts (US), Pints (US), Mili Liters, Liters, or Kilo Liters

Breather: — add a check mark to select

Process Tab

54

General — Neutral, Acidic, Caustic, or Unknown

Add a check mark to indicate any of the following gases, liquids, or solvents that are processed in this equipment and which could possibly contaminate the oil used to lubricate the equipment.

Gas

None

Air

Ammonia

Chlorine

Fluorocarbon

Organic

3-107Oil Technology

Page 186: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Steam

Vacuum

Other

Unknown

Liquid

None

Corrosive

Food

Organic

Water

Other

Unknown

Solid

None

Coal

Plastic (Organic)

Rock/Glass (Si)

Other

Unknown

Transformer

High Volt: – high rated voltage for transformer or Oil filled Circuit Breaker (OCB)

Low Volt: – low rated voltage for a transformer or OCB

Impedance: – rated impedance value

KVA: – normal voltage

Phases: – number of phases

Cycles: – normally 50 or 60.

3-108 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 187: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

# Radiators: – number of cooling radiators

# Fans: – number of forced conversion fans

External Tab

55

This dialog box is used to indicate the external environmental conditions for this lubricated equipment. The fields describe conditions which may have adverse effects on the lubricant and on the lubricated components.

Type — Corrosive, Non-Corrosive, or Unknown

Lube System — Closed, Open, or Unknown

External Temperature — Hot, Temperate, Cold, or Unknown

Humidity — Dry, Moderate, Very Humid, Wet, or Unknown

Particulate — Dusty, Average, Clean, or Unknown

3-109Oil Technology

Page 188: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

P1 Tab

56

If bearings are included in oil wetted components, use this dialog box to select the speed range and indicate the composition of the bearing materials.

Bearings — None or Unknown

Roller Cage — add a check mark to select any of the following:

None

Copper

Iron (Ferrous)

Plastic (Organic)

Other

Unknown

Sleeve (Conformed) — add a check mark to select any of the following:

None

Aluminum

Antimony

3-110 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 189: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Brass/Bronze/Copper

Cadmium

Lead (Babbit)

Plastic (Organic)

Tin

Unknown

Speed — >10,000 RPM, 1,000—10,000 RPM, 100—1,000 RPM, or 0—100 RPM

Other — add a check mark to select any of the following:

None

Aluminum

Antimony

Brass/Bronze/Copper

Cadmium

Chrome

Iron (Ferrous)

Lead (Babbit)

Nickel

Plastic (Organic)

Tin

Unknown

3-111Oil Technology

Page 190: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

P2 Tab

57

If the lubricated equipment has turbine blades, oil pumps, and other oil wetted parts, use this dialog box to indicate the material composition of each.

Gears — add a check mark to select any of the following:

None

Brass/Bronze/Copper

Chrome

Iron (Ferrous)

Non-Ferrous

Nickel

Other

Unknown

Cylinders/Pistons/Rings — add a check mark to select any of the following:

None

Aluminum

3-112 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 191: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Chrome

Iron (Ferrous)

Other

Unknown

Seals — add a check mark to select any of the following:

None

Metal

Plastic (Organic)

Silicone Sealant

Other

Unknown

Shafts/Slide/Cams — add a check mark to select any of the following:

None

Brass/Bronze/Copper

Chrome

Iron (Ferrous)

Non-Ferrous

Manganese

Nickel

Other

Unknown

3-113Oil Technology

Page 192: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

P3 Tab

58

Turbine Blades — add a check mark to select any of the following:

NonTitanium

Vanadium

Other

Unknown

Oil Pump — add a check mark to select any of the following:

None

Brass/Bronze/Copper

Chrome

Iron (Ferrous)

Non-Ferrous

Other

Unknown

Other Parts — add a check mark to select any of the following:

3-114 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 193: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

None

Aluminum

Brass/Bronze/Copper

Chrome

Iron (Ferrous)

Lead

Nickel

Plastic (Organic)

Tin

Zinc

Other

Unknown

New (Area)Selecting this Function Bar option displays the same Area Parameters screen that appears when Edit (Area) is selected. Refer to “Edit (Area)” on page 3-29 for descriptions of the various field options.

New (Equipment)Selecting this Function Bar option displays the same Equipment Parameters screen that appears when Edit (Equipment) is selected. Refer to “Edit (Equipment)” on page 3-30 for descriptions of the various field options.

New (Point)Selecting this Function Bar option displays the same two-tab screen that appears when Edit (Point) is selected. Refer to “Edit (Point)” on page 3-101 for descriptions of the various field options.

CopySelecting this option brings up the parameters dialog box for the item you have highlighted (Area, Equipment, or Point). This allows you to change any of the values before you copy the item prior to pasting it into another location.

3-115Oil Technology

Page 194: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Add BranchSelecting the Add Branch Function Bar option displays the parameters description screen immediately below the level selected (selected Area displays Equipment and selecting Equipment displays Point parameters). The values on these screens can be filled in as desired to define the branch being added.

SummaryDisplays a summary of the Area selected listing the Equipment ID, description, and number of points for each piece of equipment.

MoveRemoves the selected item (Area, Equipment, or Point) and allows you to use the Paste option to place the selected item in the highlighted target location.

DeleteBrings up a dialog box that lists the selected item and warns you about the item(s) that are being deleted.

Caution!Delete will permanently erase the selected information from the database. Once erased, the information cannot be retrieved. Use this feature with caution. Make sure a backup of the database exists.

3-116 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 195: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Analysis Parameter/Data Acquisition (Oil)

Used to edit, add, or delete analysis parameter sets. When this option is selected, the Select OIL AP Set dialog box is displayed.

59

NoteEmerson strongly recommends using the “CSI Default Oil AP Set” if at all possible. This set includes parameters which are intended to cover all minilab and lab parameters (OilView software has filters to limit the actual number of parameters viewed). A major advantage in using the “CSI Default Oil AP Set” is that it supports many predefined alarm limit sets for many different equipment types.

3-117Oil Technology

Page 196: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Add SetTo add a new analysis parameter set, click the Add Set command, and the program will advance to the Define Oil Parameter Set window (see note). After accepting this dialog box, the Oil Analysis Parameter Set dialog box will be displayed. Modify the Set Description and Number of Analysis Parameters as desired and click OK to advance to the Oil Analysis Parameter Set (#) - (Name) dialog box. Make any desired changes and click OK completes the process of adding a new set.

NoteSince the new set will be identical to the set highlighted, highlight the set closest to the desired set before executing the “Add Set”. You can then modify the fields as desired.

Delete SetThe Delete Set command can be used to delete a highlighted Analysis Parameter Set from the database.

3-118 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 197: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Edit SetTo edit an existing set, highlight the Parameter Set Description with the cursor, click the OK button, and the program will advance to the Oil Analysis Parameter Set dialog box.

60

Set Description: — can contain up to 32 characters that describe the analysis param-eter set.

Number of Analysis Parameters: — enter the number of individual oil parameters (up to 96) that are to be tested and trended in this analysis parameter set.

Caution!It is not good practice to change the analysis parameter set that has been assigned to a measurement point after data have been collected and stored for that point–trend data plots will exhibit unusual changes around the date that the alteration occurred. If the analysis parameter must be changed, Emerson rec-ommends that the collected trend data be deleted from the database, and the asso-ciated statistical values be reset to zero, before making the change.

3-119Oil Technology

Page 198: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Clicking OK on the Oil Analysis Parameter Set dialog box will advance to the Oil Analysis Parameter Set (#) - (Name) dialog box. The Set ID number of the current parameter set appears at the top of the screen for reference.

61

Description: — 12-character field that is used to describe and identify each indi-vidual analysis parameter.

Parameter Type: — identifies the oil parameter that is actually used to enter data from the oil lab report into the database. The number entered in this field corre-sponds to the individual parameter listed in the Available Oil Parameters shown on the following pages. This list can be displayed using Parm List from the Function Bar (or the Tools pulldown menu).

NoteThe Parameter Type field is used by the AMS Machinery Manager program to identify the individual parameter and to receive and pro-cess data from the oil lab. The Description field is used for labelling purposes only.

3-120 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 199: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

(Presently) Available Parameter List

3-121Oil Technology

Page 200: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

(Presently) Available Parameter List (cont)

3-122 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 201: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Parameter Units: — specifies the units that the individual analysis parameter uses for measurement. Options are listed in the Available Oil Parameters shown on the fol-lowing pages. This list can be displayed using Units List from the Function Bar (or the Tools pulldown menu).

(Presently) Available Parameter Units

Function Bar OptionsRe-Fresh — pressing this option displays the text associated with the ID # that has been changed.

Parm List — displays the list of Parameter Types.

Units List — displays the list of Parameter Units.

3-123Oil Technology

Page 202: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Alarm Limit/Data Evaluation (Oil)

Used to edit, add, or delete alarm limit sets. After selecting this option, a list of the previously defined alarm limit sets is displayed in the Select OIL AL Set dialog box.

62

3-124 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 203: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Edit SetTo edit an existing set, highlight the Alarm Limit Description with the cursor, click the Edit Set command and the program will advance to the OIL Alarm Limit Set dialog box.

63

Set Description: — can contain up to 32 characters that describe the alarm limit set.

Associated Analysis Parameter Set: — the sequence number for the Analysis Parameter Set that lists the parameters for this Alarm Limit Set.

Caution!It is extremely important to note that the entry made for the Associated Analysis Parameter Set determines the only analysis parameter set that this alarm limit set will be associated with.

3-125Oil Technology

Page 204: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Accepting the OIL Alarm Limit Set dialog box will advance to the OIL Alarm Limit Set (#) (Name) dialog box.

64

Parameter — lists the parameters that are available

Units — shows the units of measurement used for each paramter

Extreme — absolute upper limit for continued operation — you should not continue operating above this limit.

Fault — corrective action should be taken when readings exceed this level.

Alert — you should begin preparing to take corrective action when readings exceed this level.

Marginal — readings above this level indicate a measurable deterioration that is clearly identified.

Add Set To add a new alarm limit set, from the Select OIL AL Set dialog box, click the Add Set command and the program will advance to the Define Oil Alarm Limit Set dialog box.

3-126 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 205: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteThe new set will be identical to the set highlighted. Therefore, high-light the set closest to the desired set before executing the “Add Set”. You can then modify the fields as desired.

Accepting the Define Oil Alarm Limit Set dialog box will display the Oil Alarm Limit Set dialog box. Modify the two fields as desired and click OK to advance to the Oil Alarm Limit Set (#) - (Name) dialog box. Modify the various fields as desired and click OK to complete the process of adding the new Alarm Limit set.

Delete Set The Delete Set command can be used to delete an Alarm Limit Set (selected with the highlighting cursor) from the database.

Fault Frequency Set Information (Oil)

All of the functions under this option are identical to those previously described in “Fault Frequency Set Information (Periodic)” on page 3-70.

Notepad Observations (Oil)

Tribology technology does not use pre-defined notes.

Database Global Information (Oil)

All of the functions under this option are identical to those previously described in “Database Global Information (Periodic)” on page 3-83.

3-127Oil Technology

Page 206: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Thermography Technology

This section describes Thermography Technology dialog boxes.

Edit (Area)From the ADD/EDIT Database Tree Structure dialog box, with an Area selected, clicking on Edit (Function Bar option) displays the Area Parameters dialog box. Display functions on this dialog box are identical to those described in “Edit (Area)” on page 3-29.

Edit (Equipment)With a piece of Equipment selected, clicking on Edit (Function Bar option) dis-plays the Equipment Parameters dialog box. Display functions on this dialog box are identical to those described in “Edit (Equipment)” on page 3-30. Accepting this screen displays the Equipment dialog box. The Thermography Tab has the fol-lowing options.

65

Equipment Location: — select Indoor or Outdoor.

3-128 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 207: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Change Equipment Type — clicking on this button displays a list of available equip-ment categories.

Equipment Category: — describes the category such as Mechanical — Dynamic.

Equipment Type: — describes the type such as AC Motor—Driven Machine.

3-129Thermography Technology

Page 208: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Edit (Point)

Caution!With a Point selected, clicking on Edit displays either the Thermographic Meas. Pnt. Parameters dialog box or the Temperature Meas. Pnt. dialog box.

66

Example of a Thermographic Measurement Point dialog box

3-130 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 209: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Example of a Temperature Measurement Point dialog box

Measurement Point ID: — This three-character ID identifies each measurement point and must be unique for each measurement point on the same piece of equip-ment. A consistent system should be devised and used. The first or last character of the ID can be used to indicate the orientation of the sensor (see following exam-ples).

Measurement Point Description: — can contain up to 32 characters to uniquely identify each measurement point. Use of this parameter is not mandatory and the description can be left blank (or shortened) to reduce equipment analyzer memory consumption.

Measurement Point ID Description

H01 Horizontal axis, first measurement point

V03 Vertical axis, third measurement point

A01 Axial axis, first measurement point

3-131Thermography Technology

Page 210: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Monitoring Schedule (Days): — An effective Machinery Health maintenance pro-gram requires regular, periodic data collection to be taken on the monitored piece of equipment. Enter the number of days (0.1 to 365.0) that will elapse between each data collection for this measurement point. For example, enter the number 30 for a monthly data collection schedule.

The EXPORT program will use these numbers to generate an exception report for any equipment and measurement points not meeting this schedule.

Reference Voltage: — enter the default voltage for the component. For example, if the motor control center is 440V or 120V.

Reference Current: — enter the rated load for the component. For example, 150 amp breaker.

Location Code: — defines the location of the faulty component (see note).

Instruction Code: — defines the instruction codes to be used when scanning the component (see note).

Severity Criteria: — defines the severity criteria to be associated with the faulty com-ponent (see note).

NoteClicking on the Select From Code List button displays a list of avail-able Location Codes including the set numbers and descriptions.

NoteHighlighting any of these fields and selecting Help will display the list of options available for that particular field.

New (Area)Selecting this Function Bar option displays the same Area Parameters screen that appears when Edit (Area) is selected. Refer to the Edit (Area) section for descrip-tions of the various field options.

New (Equipment)Selecting this Function Bar option displays the same Equipment Parameters screen that appears when Edit (Equipment) is selected. Refer to the Edit (Equipment) section for descriptions of the various field options.

3-132 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 211: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

New (Point)Selecting this Function Bar option displays the same dialog box that appears when Edit (Point) is selected. Refer to the Edit (Point) section for descriptions of the var-ious field options.

CopySelecting this option displays the parameters dialog box for the item you have high-lighted (Area, Equipment, or Point). This allows you to change any of the values before copying the item and pasting it into another location.

Add BranchSelecting the Add Branch Function Bar option displays the parameters description screen immediately below the level selected (selected Area displays Equipment and selecting Equipment displays Point parameters). The values on these screens can be filled in as desired to define the branch being added.

SummaryDisplays a summary of the Area selected listing the Equipment ID, description, and number of points for each piece of equipment.

MoveRemoves the selected item (Area, Equipment, or Point) and allows you to use the Paste option to place the selected item in the highlighted target location.

DeleteBrings up a dialog box that lists the selected item and warns you about the item(s) that are being deleted.

Caution!Delete will permanently erase the selected information from the database. Once erased, the information cannot be retrieved. Use this feature with caution. Make sure a backup of the database exists.

Analysis Parameter/Data Acquisition (Thermography)

Thermography does not use Analysis Parameter Sets.

3-133Thermography Technology

Page 212: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Alarm Limit/Data Evaluation (Thermography)

Thermography does not use Alarm Limit Sets.

Fault Frequency Set Information (Thermography)

All of the functions under this option are identical to those previously described in “Fault Frequency Set Information (Periodic)” on page 3-70.

Notepad Observations (Thermography)

After selecting the Notepad Observations option, a list of generic and Thermo-graphic notes is displayed and can be downloaded into the equipment analyzer along with other Route information. While collecting data, these notes can be selectively assigned to a piece of equipment’s measurement points (up to 12 per piece of equipment) to record comments concerning the status of the piece of equipment. The assigned notepad observations are loaded into AMS Machinery Manager, along with the collected data, and can be accessed while using the PLOT-DATA and EXPORT programs. When a database is created, AMS Machinery Man-ager supplies a list of note codes that you can modify if desired.

3-134 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 213: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

The Notepad Observations list is used throughout the entire database–all areas and pieces of equipment access the same list. If routes from multiple databases are to be simultaneously downloaded into the analyzer, Emerson recommends that all files use the same notepad list.

67

Database Global Information (Thermography)

All of the functions under this option are identical to those previously described in “Database Global Information (Periodic)” on page 3-83.

3-135Thermography Technology

Page 214: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Motor Technology

This section describes Motor Technology dialog boxes.

Edit (Area)From the ADD/EDIT Database Tree Structure dialog box, with an Area selected, clicking on Edit (Function Bar option) displays the Area Parameters dialog box. Display functions on this dialog box are identical to those described in “Edit (Area)” on page 3-29.

Edit (Equipment)With a piece of Equipment selected, clicking on Edit (Function Bar option) dis-plays the Equipment Parameters dialog box. Display functions on this dialog box are identical to those described in “Edit (Equipment)” on page 3-30.

Edit (Point) With a Point selected, clicking on Edit displays the Motor Measurement Point Parameters dialog box. Display functions on this dialog box are identical to those described in “Edit (Point)” on page 3-34.

Function Bar OptionsThese options are identical to those described in “Function Bar Option” on page 3-42.

New (Area)Selecting this Function Bar option displays the same Area Parameters screen that appears when Edit (Area) is selected. Refer to “Edit (Area)” on page 3-29 for descriptions of the various field options.

New (Equipment)Selecting this Function Bar option displays the same Equipment Parameters screen that appears when Edit (Equipment) is selected. Refer to “Edit (Equipment)” on page 3-30 for descriptions of the various field options.

New (Point)Selecting this Function Bar option displays the same two-tab screen that appears when Edit (Point) is selected. Refer to “Edit (Point)” on page 3-34 for descriptions of the various field options.

3-136 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 215: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

CopySelecting this option displays the parameters dialog box for the item you have high-lighted (Area, Equipment, or Point). This allows you to change any of the values before copying the item and pasting it into another location.

Add BranchSelecting the Add Branch Function Bar option displays the parameters description screen immediately below the level selected (selected Area displays Equipment and selecting Equipment displays Point parameters). The values on these screens can be filled in as desired to define the branch being added.

SummaryDisplays a summary of the Area selected listing the Equipment ID, description, and number of points for each piece of equipment.

MoveRemoves the selected item (Area, Equipment, or Point) and allows you to use the Paste option to place the selected item in the highlighted target location.

DeleteBrings up a dialog box that lists the selected item and warns you about the item(s) that are being deleted.

Caution!Delete will permanently erase the selected information from the database. Once erased, the information cannot be retrieved. Use this feature with caution. Make sure a backup of the database exists.

3-137Motor Technology

Page 216: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Analysis Parameter/Data Acquisition (Motor)

Used to edit, add, or delete analysis parameter sets. When selected, the Select Peri-odic AP Set dialog box is displayed. Individual variables of an analysis parameter set are defined in the Analysis Parameter Set dialog box (see “Analysis Parameter Set” on page 3-59). All of the functions under this option are identical to those previ-ously described in the Analysis Parameter/Data Acquisition (Periodic) and Analysis Parameter Set sections.

Alarm Limit/Data Evaluation (Motor)

All of the functions under this option are identical to those previously described in “Alarm Limit/Data Evaluation (Periodic)” on page 3-64.

Fault Frequency Set Information (Motor)

All of the functions under this option are identical to those previously described in “Fault Frequency Set Information (Periodic)” on page 3-70.

Notepad Observations (Motor)

All of the functions under this option are identical to those previously described in “Notepad Observations (Periodic)” on page 3-82.

Database Global Information (Motor)

All of the functions under this option are identical to those previously described in “Database Global Information (Periodic)” on page 3-83.

3-138 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 217: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Ultrasonic Technology

This section describes Ultrasonic Technology dialog boxes.

Edit (Area)From the ADD/EDIT Database Tree Structure dialog box, with an Area selected, clicking on Edit (Function Bar option) displays the Area Parameters dialog box. Display functions on this dialog box are identical to those described in “Edit (Area)” on page 3-29.

Edit (Equipment)With a piece of Equipment selected, clicking on Edit (Function Bar option) dis-plays the Equipment Parameters dialog box. Display functions on this dialog box are identical to those described in “Edit (Equipment)” on page 3-30.

Edit (Point) With a Point selected, clicking on Edit displays the Ultrasonic Measurement Point Parameters dialog box.

3-139Ultrasonic Technology

Page 218: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteThere are six types of Ultrasonic Points: Leak Detection, Steam Trap, Mechanical, Valve, Electrical/Corona, and Sensor Defined. Some of these fields, as well as choices in those fields, may differ for each of the point types. The following is a description of a Steam Trap point to be edited.

68

Steam Trap Measurement Point Description / Gen. Info tab

Measurement Point ID: — This three-character ID identifies each measurement point and must be unique for each measurement point on the same piece of equip-ment.

Measurement Point Description: — can contain up to 32 characters to uniquely identify each measurement point. Use of this parameter is not mandatory and the description can be left blank (or shortened) to reduce equipment analyzer memory consumption.

Sensor Type: — the choices are 40 KHz Airborne, ParaScan, 40KHz Contact, RIM Sensor, RI Probe.

3-140 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 219: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteDifferent choices will be available for different Ultrasonic point types.

Manufacturer: — Select the manufacturer from a drop menu list.

Model Number: — Type in the model number.

Steam Trap Type: — the choices are Unknown, inverted bucket, float, thermostatic, float/thermostatic, and thermodynamic.

Installation Date: — Using the Number keys, enter the date the Steam Trap was installed.

Reference Pressure (psi): — Enter the expected “normal” pressure in pounds per square inch of the material being checked. For example, 250 psi.

Pipe Diameter (in): — Enter the diameter of the steam pipe in inches where the data is being taken. For example, 3.5 inches.

Steam Trap Measurement Point / Analysis tab

3-141Ultrasonic Technology

Page 220: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Monitoring Schedule (Days): — An effective predictive maintenance program requires regular, periodic data collection to be taken on the monitored piece of equipment. Enter the number of days (0.1 to 365.0) that will elapse between each data collection for this measurement point. For example, enter the number 30 for a monthly data collection schedule.

The EXPORT program will use these numbers to generate an exception report for any equipment and measurement points not meeting this schedule.

Number of Data Values In Statistical Calculations: — used in the early stages of set-ting up a database, in order to acquire data that will be used to generate statistical alarm limits (Bs) for this measurement point. The parameter entered in this field designates how many data collection sessions (1 to 1000) will be used to acquire these data. After this number of samples has been taken, the statistical alarm (Bs) will not change. Emerson recommends a minimum of six data values.

Analysis Parameter Set ID: — enter the number of the set desired. Clicking on the View Available Sets button displays the View Ultrasonic Analysis Parameter Set Information screen which describes the selected set along with the types of param-eters, qualifiers, and location.

Alarm Limit Set ID: — enter the number of the set desired. Clicking on the View Available Sets button displays the View Ultrasonic Alarm Limit Set Information screen which describes the attributes of the set selected.

Instruction Code: — enter the desired code. Clicking on the Select From Code List button displays a list of the instruction codes along with descriptions.

Visual Observation Available: — Check the box beside this statement if you can observe the point where the data is being collected.

Function Bar OptionsThese options are identical to those described in “Function Bar Option” on page 3-42.

New (Area)Selecting this Function Bar option displays the same Area Parameters screen that appears when Edit (Area) is selected. Refer to “Edit (Area)” on page 3-29 for descriptions of the various field options.

3-142 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 221: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

New (Equipment)Selecting this Function Bar option displays the same Equipment Parameters screen that appears when Edit (Equipment) is selected. Refer to “Edit (Equipment)” on page 3-30 for descriptions of the various field options.

New (Point)Selecting this Function Bar option displays the same two-tab screen that appears when Edit (Point) is selected. Refer to “Edit (Point)” on page 3-34 for descriptions of the various field options.

CopySelecting this option displays the parameters dialog box for the item you have high-lighted (Area, Equipment, or Point). This allows you to change any of the values before copying the item and pasting it into another location.

Add BranchSelecting the Add Branch Function Bar option displays the parameters description screen immediately below the level selected (selected Area displays Equipment and selecting Equipment displays Point parameters). The values on these screens can be filled in as desired to define the branch being added.

SummaryDisplays a summary of the Area selected listing the Equipment ID, description, and number of points for each piece of equipment.

MoveRemoves the selected item (Area, Equipment, or Point) and allows you to use the Paste option to place the selected item in the highlighted target location.

DeleteBrings up a dialog box that lists the selected item and warns you about the item(s) that are being deleted.

Caution!Delete will permanently erase the selected information from the database. Once erased, the information cannot be retrieved. Use this feature with caution. Make sure a backup of the database exists.

3-143Ultrasonic Technology

Page 222: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Analysis Parameter/Data Acquisition (Ultrasonic)

Used to edit, add, or delete analysis parameter sets. When selected, the Select Peri-odic AP Set dialog box is displayed. All of the functions under this option are iden-tical to those previously described in “Analysis Parameter/Data Acquisition (Periodic)” on page 3-49 and “Analysis Parameter Set” on page 3-59.

Alarm Limit/Data Evaluation (Ultrasonic)

All of the functions under this option are identical to those previously described in “Alarm Limit/Data Evaluation (Periodic)” on page 3-64.

Fault Frequency Set Information (Ultrasonic)

All of the functions under this option are identical to those previously described in “Fault Frequency Set Information (Periodic)” on page 3-70.

Notepad Observations (Ultrasonic)

All of the functions under this option are identical to those previously described in “Notepad Observations (Periodic)” on page 3-82.

Database Global Information (Ultrasonic)

All of the functions under this option are identical to those previously described in “Database Global Information (Periodic)” on page 3-83.

3-144 Database Setup/Management – DBASE

Page 223: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Chapter 4

Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Overview

The Stored Data Management program, DATMGR, performs basic utility func-tions on the spectral, waveform, and trend data sets stored in the database. DATMGR program functions include printed summaries of all stored data sets, deletion of data sets and notepad entries, modification of spectral and waveform data set labels, assignment of local spectra and waveforms, and the capability to change trend data statistics.

Getting Started

From the Setup/Communications tab of the AMS Machinery Manager Main Menu, select Stored Data Management. The options on the Data Management Functions menu will then be displayed.

1

4-1

Page 224: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Data Management Options

Selecting Data Management Options brings up the Data Mgt Functions dialog box, which displays the organization of the current database in tree form.

2

Clicking on the + symbol to the left of an area allows you to expand it to piece(s) of Equipment. Clicking on the + symbol to the left of a piece of Equipment allows you to expand it to the Measurement Point(s) level. Highlighting any item on the tree (from Database, Area, Equipment, or Point) enables you to use any of the four Function Bar options: Print, Delete, AsgnOfR-Spec, or AsgnOfR-Wave.

NoteYou can use the File pulldown menu or the Open Database icon to change databases.

4-2 Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Page 225: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Show Routes on Tree/Show MeasPnt on Tree

NoteDepending on the options that have been selected, the Tools pull-down in the Menu Bar provides the option to “Show Routes on Tree” or “Show MeasPnt (Measurement Points) on Tree” (Ctrl-S).

This Menu Bar option toggles between two options: Show Routes on a database tree or Show Measurement Points on a database tree.

When Show Routes on Tree is selected, the Data Mgt Functions screen displays a list of routes under each area like the one shown below.

3

When Show MeasPnt on Tree is selected, the Data Mgt Functions screen displays a list like the one shown on the previous page.

4-3Data Management Options

Page 226: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Show Job Data

You can convert the tree to show Jobs that were created by the 2130 data collector. Choose Show Job Data from the Tools drop-down menu under Data Management Options.

4

Assign Job: Assign jobs from the global unassigned area to a piece of equipment.

Unassign Job: Move jobs stored under a piece of equipment to the global unas-signed area.

Delete Job: Delete a job from a piece of equipment or from the global unassigned area.

Cpy UJob S/W: Copies spectra and waveform information from a job in the global unassigned area into an existing measurement point. All spectra and waveform information is copied. Perform this operation at the point level - highlight the point and then click the “Cpy UJob S/W” button.

4-4 Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Page 227: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Print (Database)

Selecting Print with a Database selected brings up the Entire Database Data Print Options dialog box.

Selection Options Tab

5

Use asterisks or question marks as wildcards in these menus.

Filter by Area IDs? — add a check mark if you want to filter by Area IDs.

Area ID Filter: — if the previous field (Filter by Area IDs) is checked, you can use up to four characters to define a filter. An asterisk (*) can be used in any position as a wild card. For instance, if the filter is ST**, any ID whose first character is S and second character is T will pass the filter because the third and fourth characters are wild cards (which means any character will match).

Filter by Equipment IDs? — add a checkmark if you want to filter by Equipment IDs.

Equipment ID Filter: — use up to 10 characters to define this field. See Area ID Filter for a general description.

4-5Data Management Options

Page 228: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Filter by Measurement Point IDs? — add a checkmark if you want to filter by Mea-surement Point IDs.

Measurement Point ID Filter: — use up to three characters to define this field. See Area ID Filter for a general description.

Adding a checkmark in front of any of the following options allows you to print the type of data selected.

Print Off-Route Data?

Print Periodic Data?

Print Tribology Data?

Print Thermography Data?

Print Online Data?

Print Motor Data?

Print Ultrasonic Data?

Data Extent Options Tab

6

Extent of Gross Scan to Print: — select None, Summary, or Details.

4-6 Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Page 229: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Extent of Trend to Print: — select None, Summary, or Details.

Extent of Spectra to Print: — select None or Summary.

Extent of Waveform to Print: — select None or Summary.

Limit Time Span? — checking this option allows you to limit the time span for the data that will be printed. If selected, complete the Starting/ Ending Dates and Times in the fields below.

Starting Date: Time:

Ending Date: Time:

NoteThis option does not work for printing Trend Summary data. If used with Trend Summary, you will get all the trend summary data, not just that of the start date to the end date.

4-7Data Management Options

Page 230: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Print (Area)

Selecting Print with an Area selected brings up the Area Data Print Options dialog box.

Selection Options Tab

7

Filter by Equipment IDs? — add a checkmark if you want to filter the Equipment by ID’s.

Equipment ID Filter: — if the previous field (Filter by Equipment IDs) is checked, you can use up to 10 characters to define a filter. An asterisk (*) can be used in any position as a wild card. For instance, if the filter is ST********, any ID whose first character is S and second character is T will pass the filter because the remaining characters are wild cards (which means any character will match).

Filter by Measurement Point IDs? — add a checkmark if you want to filter by Mea-surement Point IDs.

Measurement Point ID Filter: — see Equipment ID Filter for a general description.

Adding a checkmark in front of any of the following options allows you to print the type of data selected.

4-8 Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Page 231: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Print Periodic Data?

Print Tribology Data?

Print Thermography Data?

Print Online Data?

Print Motor Data?

Print UltraSonic Data?

Data Extent Options Tab

8

Extent of Gross Scan to Print: — select None, Summary, or Details.

Extent of Trend to Print: — select None, Summary, or Details.

Extent of Spectra to Print: — select None or Summary.

Extent of Waveform to Print: — select None or Summary.

Limit Time Span? — checking this option allows you to limit the time span for the data that will be printed. If selected, complete the Starting/ Ending Dates and Times in the fields below.

Starting Date: Time:

4-9Data Management Options

Page 232: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Ending Date: Time:

NoteThis option does not work for printing Trend Summary data. If used with Trend Summary, you will get all the trend summary data, not just that of the start date to the end date.

4-10 Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Page 233: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Print (Equipment)

Selecting Print with a piece of Equipment selected brings up the Equipment Data Print Options dialog box.

Selection Options Tab

Example of Equipment without Online points

Example of Equipment with only Online points

4-11Data Management Options

Page 234: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteOnly those measurement points assigned to a piece of equipment will appear when the Print option is selected for that piece of equipment. For example, a “Print Online Data?” option appears only if you have online points for that piece of equipment. If you do not, it will not appear. Similarly, if online points are the only ones you have for a piece of equipment then only “Print Online Data?” appears. The two illustrations above illustrate this point.

Filter by Measurement Point IDs?— add a checkmark if you want to filter by Mea-surement Point IDs.

Measurement Point ID Filter: — if the previous field (Filter by Measurement Point IDs) is checked, you can use up to three characters to define a filter. An asterisk (*) can be used in any position as a wild card. For instance, if the filter is ST*, any ID whose first character is S and second character is T will pass the filter because the remaining character is a wild card (which means any character will match).

Adding a checkmark in front of any of the following options allows you to print the type of data selected.

Print Periodic Data?

Print Online Data?

Print Tribology Data?

Print Thermography Data?

Print Motor Data?

4-12 Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Page 235: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Data Extent Options Tab

Example of Equipment without Gross Scan option

Example of Equipment with Gross Scan option

4-13Data Management Options

Page 236: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteOnly if a piece of equipment has an online measurement point assigned to it will the “Extent of Gr. Scan to Print” appear under the Data Extent Options tab. If not, this option will not appear. The two illustrations above illustrate this point.

Extent of Gr. (Gross) Scan to Print: — select None, Summary, or Details.

Extent of Trend to Print: — select None, Summary, or Details.

Extent of Spectra to Print: — select None or Summary.

Extent of Waveform to Print: — select None or Summary.

Limit Time Span? — checking this option allows you to limit the time span for the data that will be printed. If selected, complete the Starting/Ending Dates and Times in the fields below.

Starting Date: Time:

Ending Date: Time:

NoteThis option does not work for printing Trend Summary data. If used with Trend Summary, you will get all the trend summary data, not just that of the start date to the end date.

4-14 Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Page 237: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Print (Measurement Point)

Selecting Print with a Measurement Point selected brings up the Measurement Point Print Options dialog box.

NoteIf the measurement points for other types of technologies are selected, the dialog box is tailored for that technology. For example, no “Extent of Spectra to Print” and “Extent of Waveform to Print” will appear if an oil (Tribology) measurement point is selected. Also, there be no spectra or waveform information under Available Data. Conversely, “Extent of Gr. (Gross) Scan to Print” will be added to an online measurement point, as well as gross scan information under the Available Data heading.

Example of Online Measurement Point Print Options dialog box

Available Data: — this section lists the measurement point data that is available for printing including the number of trend, spectra, and waveforms and the time spans during which they were taken.

4-15Data Management Options

Page 238: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Gr. Scan: – see above.

Trend: – see above.

Spectra: – see above.

Waveform: – see above.

Extent of Gr. Scan to Print: — select None, Summary, or Details.

Extent of Trend to Print: — select None, Summary, or Details.

Extent of Spectra to Print: — select None, Summary, or Values.

Extent of Waveform to Print: — select None, Summary, or Values.

Limit Time Span? — checking this option allows you to limit the time span for the data that will be printed. If selected, complete the Starting/Ending Dates and Times in the fields below.

Starting Date: Time:

Ending Date: Time:

NoteThis option does not work for printing Trend Summary data. If used with Trend Summary, you will get all the trend summary data, not just that of the start date to the end date.

Delete (Database)

Selecting Delete with a Database selected brings up the Entire Database Data Delete Options dialog box.

4-16 Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Page 239: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Selection Options Tab

9

All of these options are described in “Print (Database)” on page 4-5 under the Selection Options Tab.

4-17Data Management Options

Page 240: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Data Range Options Tab

10

Range of Gr. (Gross) Scan Data to Delete: None, All, or Last.

Range of Trend Data to Delete: None, All, or Last.

Range of Spectral Data to Delete: None, All, or Last.

Range of Waveform Data to Delete: None, All, or Last.

Limit Time Span? — When selected, enter the Starting and Ending Dates and Times.

If Not Selecting, Delete Even if ...

Spectra: First Reference Save

Waveform: First Reference Save

Add a checkmark in front of the appropriate option to make a selection(s).

4-18 Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Page 241: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Delete (Area)

Selecting Delete with an Area selected brings up the Area Data Delete Options dialog box.

Selection Options Tab

11

All of these options are described in “Print (Area)” on page 4-8 under the Selection Options Tab.

4-19Data Management Options

Page 242: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Data Range Options Tab

12

All of these options are described in “Data Range Options Tab” on page 4-18.

4-20 Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Page 243: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Delete (Equipment)

Selecting Delete with a piece of Equipment selected brings up the Equipment Data Delete Options dialog box.

Selection Options TabAll of these options are described in “Print (Equipment)” on page 4-11 under the Selection Options Tab.

Example of Equipment without Online points

Example of Equipment with only Online Points

4-21Data Management Options

Page 244: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteOnly those measurement points assigned to a piece of equipment will appear when the Delete option is selected for that piece of equip-ment. For example, a “Delete Online Data?” option appears only if you have online points for that piece of equipment. If you do not, it will not appear. Similarly, if online points are the only ones you have for a piece of equipment then only “Delete Online Data?” appears. The two illustrations above illustrate this point.

4-22 Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Page 245: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Data Range Options TabAll of these options are described in “Data Range Options Tab” on page 4-18.

Example of Equipment without Gross Scan option

Example of Equipment with Gross Scan option

4-23Data Management Options

Page 246: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteOnly if a piece of equipment has an online measurement point assigned to it will the “Range of Gr. Scan to Delete” appear under the Data Range Options tab. If not, this option will not appear. The two illustrations above illustrate this point.

4-24 Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Page 247: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Delete (Measurement Point)

Selecting Delete with a Periodic Measurement Point selected brings up the Peri-odic Measurement Point Delete Options dialog box.

NoteIf the measurement points for other types of technologies are selected, the dialog box is tailored for that technology. For example, no “Range of Spectra to Delete” and “Range of Waveform to Delete” displays if an oil (Tribology) measurement point is selected. Also, no spectra or waveform information displays under Available Data. Con-versely, “Range of Gr. (Gross) Scan to Delete” will be added to an online measurement point, as well as gross scan information under the Available Data heading.

13

Available Data:

Gr. (Gross) Scan: – lists number of trends available including the beginning and ending dates that the data was collected.

4-25Data Management Options

Page 248: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Trend: – lists number of trends available including the beginning and ending dates that the data was collected.

Spectra: – see Trend description.

Waveform: – see Trend description.

Range of Gr. Scan to be Deleted: None, All, or Last.

Range of Trend Data to Delete: None, All, or Last.

Range of Spectral Data to Delete: None, All, Last, or Selected.

Range of Waveform Data to Delete: None, All, Last, or Selected.

Limit Time Span? — checking this option allows you to limit the time span for the data that will be deleted. If selected, complete the Starting/Ending Dates and Times in the fields below.

Starting Date: Time:

Ending Date: Time:

If Not Selecting, Delete Even if ...

Spectra: First Reference Save

Waveform: First Reference Save

Add a checkmark in front of the appropriate option to make a selection(s).

AsgnOfR-Spec

With an Area selected, this option brings up a dialog box that lists the datasets that are available for assignment.

AsgnOfR-Wave

With an Area selected, this option brings up a dialog box that lists the datasets that are available for assignment.

4-26 Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Page 249: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Data Statistics Options

Selecting this option brings up the Statistics Mgt Functions dialog box. Beginning with this dialog box, you can reestablish or manually define the baseline and statis-tical values (averages and standard deviations) that determine alarm conditions for the acquired data. These features are particularly useful if you want to customize these statistical values. Each selection can be performed for selected measurement points, all the measurement points on a specified piece of equipment, or all mea-surement points on all the equipment defined in a selected area.

Statistics Mgt Functions Dialog Box

Available Function Bar options are described in the following sections.

NoteDepending on the options that have been selected, the Tools pull-down menu also provides the option to “Show Routes on Tree” (Ctrl-S).

4-27Data Statistics Options

Page 250: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Overview of Function Bar Options

Show Routes on Tree/Show MeasPnt (Measurement Points) on TreeThis option was previously described in “Show Routes on Tree/Show MeasPnt on Tree” on page 4-3.

Clear BaslinIn the early stages of a vibration analysis program, there may be data sets collected and stored that contain errors or erratic values, because the analyst is learning how to use the device. AMS Machinery Manager automatically assigns the first set of vibration data stored for a particular measurement point as its baseline data set.

If you do not wish to establish this first set as baseline data, select this option to reset the baseline values to zero. The data sets previously stored are not destroyed how-ever, the next vibration data set stored in the database for the location(s) of interest will automatically become the new baseline.

Clr Ave/SigmEnables you to reset to zero any averages or standard deviations calculated for a measurement location. These values are calculated from a sample of data sets as defined by the Measurement Point Information window. After this option is acti-vated, the average and standard deviation is calculated from the data sets subse-quently stored in the database. Any previously-stored data sets are ignored for this calculation.

Clr All StatCombines the action of the previous two options. The values identified as baseline, average, and standard deviation are returned to zero and new values are estab-lished by subsequent vibration data sets stored in the database. Previously-collected data sets are simply ignored.

Set Basl = AveEnables you to set the baseline values stored for a measurement point to be equal to the average values calculated from its statistical sample.

4-28 Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Page 251: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Calc New StatEnables you to specify a beginning and ending date, and time associated with a sample of data sets for the calculation of new statistics. If the number of data sets within the specified time interval is less than the total amount required for a sample, AMS Machinery Manager calculates new averages and standard deviations using the available data sets. It continues to update these values as each new data set is stored until the defined sample of data sets have been completed.

Manual EditEnables you to manually enter the statistical values used for determining the alarm conditions for the acquired data. You are required to define the baseline, average, and standard deviation for each analysis parameter associated with each measure-ment point. With this option, you are never required to collect and store data sets for a complete statistical sample.

Caution!Modifying trend data statistics is a powerful tool for the analyst. If improperly used, however, RBMview alarm reporting features can be made misleading and ineffective. Exercise extreme caution when performing any of these baseline and statistical value changes.

4-29Data Statistics Options

Page 252: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Clear Basline (Database)

Selecting Clear Basline with a Database selected brings up the Entire Database Sta-tistics Modify Options dialog box.

14

Filter by Area IDs? — add a check mark if you want to filter by Area IDs.

Area ID Filter: — if the previous field (Filter by Area IDs) is checked, you can use up to four characters to define a filter. An asterisk (*) can be used in any position as a wild card. For instance, if the filter is ST**, any ID whose first character is S and second character is T will pass the filter because the third and fourth characters are wild cards (which means any character will match).

Filter by Equipment IDs? — add a check mark if you want to filter by Equipment IDs.

Equipment ID Filter: — use up to 10 characters to define this field. See Area ID Filter for a general description.

Filter by Measurement Point IDs? — add a check mark if you want to filter by Mea-surement Point IDs.

4-30 Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Page 253: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Measurement Point ID Filter: — use up to three characters to define this field. See Area ID Filter for a general description.

Add a checkmark to select any of the following:

Modify Periodic Statistics?

Modify Tribology Statistics?

Modify Thermography Statistics?

Modify Motor Statistics?

Modify UltraSonic Statistics?

4-31Data Statistics Options

Page 254: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Clear Baslin (Area)

Selecting Clear Baslin with an Area selected brings up the Area Statistics Modify Options dialog box.

15

All of the following options are described in “Clear Basline (Database)” on page 4-30.

Filter by Equipment IDs?

Equipment ID Filter:

Filter by Measurement Point IDs?

Measurement Point ID Filter:

Add a checkmark to select any of the following:

Modify Periodic Statistics?

Modify Tribology Statistics?

Modify Thermography Statistics?

Modify Motor Statistics?

4-32 Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Page 255: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Modify UltraSonic Statistics?

4-33Data Statistics Options

Page 256: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Clear Baslin (Equipment)

Selecting Clear Baslin with a Equipment selected brings up the Equipment Statis-tics Modify Options dialog box.

16

All of the following options are described in “Clear Basline (Database)” on page 4-30.

Filter by Measurement Point IDs?

Measurement Point ID Filter:

Add a checkmark to select any of the following:

Modify Periodic Statistics?

Modify Tribology Statistics?

Modify Thermography Statistics?

Modify Motor Statistics?

4-34 Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Page 257: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Clr Ave/Sigm

All of the dialog boxes and options for Database, Area, and Equipment are iden-tical to those previously described in the Clear Baslin sections.

Clr All Stat

All of the dialog boxes and options for Database, Area, and Equipment are iden-tical to those previously described in the Clear Baslin sections.

Set Basl = Ave

All of the dialog boxes and options for Database, Area, and Equipment are iden-tical to those previously described in the Clear Baslin sections.

Calc New Stat

Selecting CalcNew Stat with a Database selected brings up the two-tab Entire Data-base Statistics Modify Options dialog box.

Selection Options Tab

17

4-35Data Statistics Options

Page 258: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

The following options are identical to those previously described in the Clear Baslin section.

Filter by Area IDs?

Area ID Filter:

Filter by Equipment IDs?

Equipment ID Filter:

Filter by Measurement Point IDs?

Measurement Point ID Filter:

Add a checkmark to select any of the following:

Modify Periodic Statistics?

Modify Tribology Statistics?

Modify Thermography Statistics?

Modify Motor Statistics?

Modify UltraSonic Statistics?

Calculation Options Tab

18

4-36 Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Page 259: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Add a checkmark to select the following:

Modify Baseline?

If checked, enter the starting and ending dates and times to select the range from which to select the First Trend.

Modify Average/Sigma?

If checked, enter the starting date and time from which to average the data. Also, enter the number of Samples to Average.

4-37Data Statistics Options

Page 260: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Manual Edit

When selected (for Measurement Point Only), the Statistics Manual Entry dialog box is displayed.

19

This dialog box shows the values and allows you to change the following parame-ters: Overall, Sub & 1x TS, 2x TS. 3—8x TS, 9—35x TS, 36—65x TS, and 1—10kHz. For each of these parameters, the columns show values for Baseline, #Avg, Average, and Std. Dev. The last column also lists the units of measurement for each parameter.

4-38 Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Page 261: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Data Label Options

Selecting this option displays the Data Label Management Functions dialog box. This dialog box has Function Bar options that enable you to change the labels on spectra or waveforms stored in the database. Labels include RPM, Load, Tag and text. You can change labels by point, equipment, route, area, database or all off-route data sets.

20

Using the spectral and waveform labeling option, a descriptive label of up to 32 characters can be defined for each data set, facilitating quick identification of base-line, alarm, and other spectral data of interest. The RPM and LOAD values can also be modified as needed.

Tree by Routes/Tree by Measurement Point

This option was previously described in “Show Routes on Tree/Show MeasPnt on Tree” on page 4-3.

4-39Data Label Options

Page 262: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Change Label (Database)

Selecting the Change Label option displays the Globally Modify Stored Data Labels dialog box.

21

All of the following options are described in “Clear Basline (Database)” on page 4-30.

Filter By Equipment ID

Filter By Area ID

Filter By Measurement Point ID

Add a checkmark to select from the following options:

Modify Data From Periodic Points

Modify Data From Continuous Points

Modify Data From Status Points

Modify Data From Motor Points

Modify Off-Route Data

4-40 Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Page 263: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Change Label (Area)

Except for the omission of one of the filter options, all of the dialog boxes and options for Area are identical to those previously described in the Change Label (Database) sections.

Change Label (Equipment)

Clicking on Change Label with Equipment selected displays the Globally Modify Stored Data Labels dialog box with the following fields:

Filter By Measurement Point ID — add a checkmark if you want to filter the Mea-surement Point ID then, use up to three characters to complete the Measurement Point ID field.

Add a checkmark to select either of the following:

Modify Data From Periodic Points

Modify Data From Motor Points

4-41Data Label Options

Page 264: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Change Label (Measurement Point)

Clicking on Change Label with a Measurement Point selected displays the Modify Stored Spectral Data dialog box.

NoteFor Online, you will be asked to select desired data collection set. Data stored under selected data collection set will then be displayed.

22

This box shows the Date, Time, and Hz for each Spectral Data Set stored along with the following fields:

RPM

Load

Tag

Label

4-42 Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Page 265: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

An “S” entered into the Tag column assigns the spectral or waveform data a “save” tag, preventing the accidental deletion of the data. Also, the Tag column may be used to designate a particular spectrum as the reference (“R”) spectrum.

Spctrl Data/Wavfrm Data

This Function Bar option toggles between the Modify Stored Spectral Data and Modify Stored Waveform dialog boxes. These two screens display the Date, Time, Hz, RPM, Load, Tag and label for the selected Spectral/Waveform Data Sets.

Update

Selecting this Function Bar option stores the values displayed into the database.

Reset Ref

Selecting this Function Bar option allows you to reset the reference tag on the mea-surement point. After moving through the filtering methods described above for the Change Label option (Database, Area, Equipment or Measurement Point, depending on what is highlighted in the navigation tree), you will be able to select the type of data to modify. You can reset for spectral data only, waveform data only or both spectral and waveform data. There are two option types. You can remove the reference without it being set on the next data dump or allow the reference to rearm and be set on the next data dump.

4-43Data Label Options

Page 266: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

4-44 Stored Data Management - DATMGR

Page 267: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Chapter 5

Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

* 1

The Database Utility (DBUtly) program provides tasks designed to extract, merge, and modify database information.

NoteBefore using this program, Emerson strongly recommends that you backup your databases.

5-1

Page 268: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

DBUtly Tasks

The following three tasks are provided by DBUtly:

• The Copy/Move task provides the capability to copy or move information from a source database to a target database. Duplicate information will be created in the target database when a Copy is performed. A Move will transfer information to the target database and remove that information from the source database.

• The Modify Equipment task provides the capability to modify information about equipment stored in an AMS Machinery Manager database.

• The Modify Measurement Points task provides the capability to modify information about measurement points stored in an AMS Machinery Man-ager database.

DBUtly Tasks Window.

DBUtly Toolbar

New Task - This button will display a window with the three DBUtly tasks so that you may switch between tasks.

Open - This button will display the Database Selection Window, allowing you to select a database to be opened.

Execute - This button will execute the actions that are specified in the Actions Window. It is valid only for the “Modify Equipment” and “Modify Measurement Points” tasks.

Report - This button will generate a report (please see “Reports” on page 5-5).

Cut - This button will cut the selection and place it on the clipboard.

5-2 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

Page 269: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Copy - This button will copy the selection and place it on the clipboard.

Paste - This button will insert the contents of the clipboard.

Toggle Filter/Actions - This button is a toggle that will show or hide the Filter/Actions Window. It is valid only for the “Modify Equipment” and “Modify Measure-ment Points” tasks.

Display Log File - This button will display the most recent DBUtly log file in a CSI-View window.

Select All - This button will place all items that are in the active window on the selec-tion list.

Deselect All - This button will remove all items that are in the active window from the selection list.

Cascade Windows - This button will arrange the open windows so that they overlap.

Tile Windows Horizontal - This button will arrange the open windows as non-over-lapping horizontal tiles.

Tile Windows Vertical - This button will arrange the open windows as non-overlap-ping vertical tiles.

Help - This button will display the help.

5-3

Page 270: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Other DBUtly Options

There are some DBUtly options that are available only via the menu bar. Some options may or may not be available depending upon several factors.

File MenuNew Database... - This option will create a new AMS Machinery Manager data-base.

Close Database- This option will close the active database.

Duplicate Database... - This option will export all or part of the active database to a new file. The same set of option tabs will be displayed that are displayed for a Copy/Move (please see “Options” on page 5-11).

Print Setup... - This option will allow you to change the printer and printing options.

Exit - This option will exit the DBUtly program.

View MenuToolbar - This option is a toggle that will show or hide the toolbar.

Status Bar - This option is a toggle that will show or hide the status bar.

Options MenuPreferences... - This option will display the preferences dialog box. There are two tabs of preferences. The General tab includes the following preferences:

• whether or not to automatically load the active AMS Machinery Manager database upon application startup

• whether or not to automatically arrange the database windows when a new task is initiated

• whether or not to automatically display the log file after modifying equip-ment, after modifying measurement points, and after transferring database information

• whether or not to create a new log file that will overwrite the existing log file

The Copy/Move tab includes the following preference:

• whether or not to direct the error messages output to only the log file

5-4 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

Page 271: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Window MenuArrange Icons - This option will arrange icons at the bottom of the window.

Help MenuTopics - This option displays the help beginning with the topic of the active task.

Contents - This option displays the help.

How To - This option displays the help beginning with the example for the active task.

About DBUtly... - This option displays version and copyright information.

Reports

Several reports are available from DBUtly. To generate a report, select an item in the left pane of the Database Window and then click on the “Report” button, use the “Report” option from the “File” menu, or right-click and select “Report...” from the shortcut menu. A Report Options Window will be displayed.

Report Options Window

Select the desired report from the scrolling region at the top of the Report Options Window. Check the “Table” checkbox if you want the report in a tabular format, or leave it unchecked if you want the report in a list format (this option may be unavail-able for some reports).

5-5

Page 272: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

At the bottom of the Report Options Window, there are two scrolling regions. The scrolling region on the left is a list of fields that are available to be placed on the report. The scrolling region on the right is a list of fields that will be listed on the report. To remove a field from the report, select the field to be removed (from the scrolling region on the right) and click the “< Remove” button. To add a field to the report, select the field to be added (from the scrolling region on the left) and click the “Add >” button.

You may determine the order of the fields that are to be listed on the report. To move a field, select it from the scrolling region on the right and click the “Up” or “Down” button to place it in the desired order.

After selecting the desired report and fields, click the “OK” button on the Report Options Window to generate the report. The report will be displayed in a window. Use the buttons at the top of this window to navigate through the pages of the report, to zoom in and out, to send the report to the printer, and to close the report.

The following table lists the available reports and the type of item(s) that must be selected in order for the report to be generated:

5-6 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

Page 273: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Report Selected Item

Area Information Summary Area,Equipment List

Measurement Point Information Summary - Periodic Vibration

Area,Equipment List

Measurement Point Information Summary - Online Vibration

Area,Equipment List

Measurement Point Information - Status Area,Equipment List

Measurement Point Information - Tribology Area,Equipment List

Measurement Point Information Summary - Ultrasonic Area,Equipment List

Baseline Values Area,Equipment List

Analysis Parameter Information Summary Analysis Parameter Set

Alarm Limit Information Summary Alarm Limit Set

Fault Frequency Information Summary Fault Frequency Set

Note Code/Observations Summary Predefined Notes

5-7

Page 274: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Copy/Move

The Copy/Move task provides the capability to copy or move information from a source database to a target database.

Database Window

Click the “Open” button on the tool bar or use the “Open Database...” option from the “File” menu to open a database. The Database Selection Window will be dis-played with a list of available databases. Select the desired database from the list and then click the “OK” button. The structure tree of the opened database will be dis-played in a window. If necessary, repeat this process to open more than one data-base. Each database structure tree will be displayed in its own window.

Database Window

Copy vs. Cut

A Copy transfers information to the target database without changing the source database. If the same database is both the target and the source, a Copy will make a duplicate in that database. A Move transfers information to the target database and immediately deletes that information out of the source database.

5-8 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

Page 275: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Copying Information

There are five methods that may be used to copy database information.

Drag and DropClick once on the source item in the Database Window and hold down the left mouse button. Move the mouse pointer to the target item in the Database Window and then release the mouse button.

If the target is valid for the copy, a plus sign (“+”) will be displayed below the pointer before you release the mouse button.

If the target is invalid for the copy, the pointer will become a circle with a slash before you release the mouse button.

Menu OptionsSelect the source item in the Database Window. Use the “Copy” option from the “Edit” menu. Select the target item in the Database Window and use the “Paste” option from the “Edit” menu. If the copy is invalid for the selected target, the “Paste” option will be inactive on the “Edit” menu.

Right Mouse ClickSelect the source item in the Database Window. Click the right mouse button once to display a pop-up menu. Click on the “Copy” option. Select the target item in the Database Window and right-click to display the pop-up menu. Click on the “Paste” option. If the copy is invalid for the selected target, the “Paste” option will be inac-tive on the pop-up menu.

KeyboardSelect the source item in the Database Window. Press the “Ctrl” key and hold it down while pressing the letter “c.” Release both keys. Select the target item in the Database Window. Press the “Ctrl” key and hold it down while pressing the letter “v.” Release both keys.

Toolbar ButtonsSelect the source item in the Database Window. Click on the “Copy” button located on the toolbar.

Select the target item in the Database Window and click on the “Paste” button. If the copy is invalid for the selected target, the “Paste” button will be inactive.

5-9Copy/Move

Page 276: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Moving Information

There are five methods that may be used to move database information.

Drag and DropClick once on the source item in the Database Window and hold down the left mouse button. Press the “Ctrl” key on the keyboard and hold it down. Move the mouse pointer to the target item in the Database Window and then release the mouse button and the “Ctrl” key.

If the target is invalid for the move, the pointer will become a circle with a slash before you release the mouse button.

Menu OptionsSelect the source item in the Database Window. Use the “Cut” option from the “Edit” menu. Select the target item in the Database Window and use the “Paste” option from the “Edit” menu. If the move is invalid for the selected target, the “Paste” option will be inactive on the “Edit” menu.

Right Mouse ClickSelect the source item in the Database Window. Click the right mouse button once to display a pop-up menu. Click on the “Cut” option. Select the target item in the Database Window and right-click to display the pop-up menu. Click on the “Paste” option. If the move is invalid for the selected target, the “Paste” option will be inac-tive on the pop-up menu.

KeyboardSelect the source item in the Database Window. Press the “Ctrl” key and hold it down while pressing the letter “x.” Release both keys. Select the target item in the Database Window. Press the “Ctrl” key and hold it down while pressing the letter “v.” Release both keys.

ButtonsSelect the source item in the Database Window. Click on the “Cut” button located on the toolbar.

Select the target item in the Database Window and click on the “Paste” button. If the move is invalid for the selected target, the “Paste” button will be inactive.

5-10 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

Page 277: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Options

There are many different options available for Copy/Move. Options allow you to control aspects of the transfer such as what to do if duplicates are found, which spe-cific items should be transferred, and how statistics are to be handled. The options that are available depend upon which items are being transferred. Options are listed on various tabs of the Options Window, which is displayed immediately after a Copy or Move has been initiated in the Database Window (please see “Copying Information” on page 5-9 or “Moving Information” on page 5-10 for details on ini-tiating a Copy or Move).

Structure Options

Structure Options Tab

Include checkbox - This checkbox will be displayed only when transferring areas or equipment. Checking this option will include the children in the transfer.

5-11Copy/Move

Page 278: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Limit Point IDs - This option may be used to select and/or limit the points to be transferred based on the three-character measurement point IDs. The available values in this drop-down list are as follows:

First Point ID and Second Point ID - These fields are available only if the “Limit Point IDs” option is not “Off.”

If the “Limit Point IDs” option is “Include,” a measurement point ID must match the filter of either the “First Point ID” field or the “Second Point ID” field before being transferred. If the “Limit Point IDs” option is “Exclude,” a measurement point ID that matches the filter of either the “First Point ID” field or the “Second Point ID” field will not be transferred. In both cases, if the “Second Point ID” field is blank, only the “First Point ID” field will be used to determine which measurement points will be transferred.

Actual characters from the measurement point IDs can be used in these two fields as well as the question mark (“?”) wildcard character. The question mark wildcard character indicates that any character will be accepted for the position it represents.

Examples (using the “Include” option):

M?? will transfer all points with an “M” in the first position.

?OH will transfer all points with an “OH” in the last two positions.

Value Description

Off All measurement points will be transferred.

Include Only the measurement points that match the filters specified by the “First Point ID” and the “Second Point ID” fields will be transferred.

Exclude All measurement points except those that match the filters specified by the “First Point ID” and the “Second Point ID” fields will be transferred.

5-12 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

Page 279: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Area - This option indicates how the areas will be transferred. The available values in this drop-down list are as follows:

The criteria for duplication of an area is as follows:

• Area ID

• Description

Equipment - This option indicates how the equipment will be transferred. The available values in this drop-down list are as follows:

The criteria for duplication of equipment are as follows:

• Equipment ID

• Description

• Classification

• equipment with the same Equipment Type flag

• equipment with the same Reference RPM and Load

• equipment with the same Speed Type flag

• equipment with the same FPM/RPM Conversion Factor

• equipment with the same Enter Speed/Load Only Once

• equipment with the same Fixed Tach Location flag

Value Description

New A new area will be created in the database.

NoDup Duplicate areas will be ignored.

Merge If a duplicate area is found, the children of the source area will be added to the duplicate area.

Value Description

New New equipment will be created in the area; if the source equipment ID already exists in the target area, a new equipment ID will be assigned.

NoDup Duplicate equipment will be ignored.

Merge If duplicate equipment is found, the children of the source equipment will be added to the duplicate equipment.

5-13Copy/Move

Page 280: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Point - This option indicates how the measurement points will be transferred. The available values in this drop-down list are as follows:

The criteria for duplicate measurement points are as follows:

• Point ID

• Description

• Units

• points with the same Sensor Unit Type

• points with the same Sensitivity

• DC points with the same DC Offset

• points with the same Reference RPM

• points with the same analysis parameter set

NoteMerging points requires all point variables and the analysis parameter set variables to match, since data could be adversely affected if mea-surement point types, frequency bands, or other variables are changed.

Value Description

New A new point will be created in the equipment; if the source point ID already exists on target equipment, a new point ID will be assigned.

NoDup Duplicate measurement points will be ignored.

Merge If duplicate measurement points are found, the children of the source measurement points will be added to the duplicate.

5-14 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

Page 281: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Data Options

Data Options Tab

Transfer Gross Scan Data? – Checking this option allows you to transfer the gross scan data to the target database.

Limited Time Span? — Checking this option allows you to input the starting date/time and ending date/time for the trend data being transferred. This option is available only if the “Transfer Gross Scan Data?” option is checked.

Transfer Trend Data? - Checking this option allows you to transfer the trend data to the target database.

Limited Time Span? - Checking this option allows you to input the starting date/time and ending date/time for the trend data being transferred. This option is available only if the “Transfer Trend Data?” option is checked.

Transfer Spectral Data? - Checking this option allows you to transfer the spectral data to the target database.

5-15Copy/Move

Page 282: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Limited Time Span? - Checking this option allows you to input the starting date/time and ending date/time for the spectral data being transferred. This option is available only if the “Transfer Spectral Data?” option is checked.

Transfer Waveform Data? - Checking this option allows you to transfer the wave-form data to the target database.

Limited Time Span? - Checking this option allows you to input the starting date/time and ending date/time for the waveform data being transferred. This option is available only if the “Transfer Waveform Data?” option is checked.

Statistics Options - This option determines how statistics will be handled during the transfer. The available values in this drop-down list are as follows:

NoteIf the “Ignore” option is chosen and data are transferred, no statistics will be generated in the target database. If any of the target alarm types rely on the baselines, the alarm and fault values will show up as zero. The statistics will be updated with the first new data set.

Value Description

Ignore The statistics stored on the point will not be changed.

Redo The statistics will be reconstructed using all data (source and target) after merge.

Copy The statistics will be transferred from the source database to the target database.

Redo/New If the source data are later than the target data, the statistics will be recalculated.

Redo/All The statistics will be updated using all source data whether it is newer or not.

5-16 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

Page 283: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Set Options

Set Options Tab

Duplicate Set Option - This option determines how analysis parameter sets, alarm limit sets, and fault frequency sets will be transferred. The available values in this drop-down list are as follows:

Value Description

Re-number If a duplicate set is found in the target database, the source set will be transferred and a new set number will be assigned.

Overwrite If a duplicate set is found in the target database, it will be overwritten with the source set.

Ignore If a duplicate set is found in the target database, the source set will not be transferred.

5-17Copy/Move

Page 284: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

External File Options

External File Options Tab

Transfer RBMview Information? - Checking this option allows you to transfer RBMview information to the target database.

Transfer RBMview Case Histories? - Checking this option allows you to transfer RBMview case histories to the target database. This options is available only if the “Transfer RBMview Information?” option is checked.

Limited Time Span? - Checking this option allows you to input the starting date/time and ending date/time for the RBMview case histories being transferred. This option is available only if the “Transfer RBMview Case Histories?” option is checked.

Transfer Equipment Configurations? - Checking this option allows you to transfer equipment configurations to the target database.

Delete IR Images From Source? - Checking this option deletes the IR image files from the source after they are successfully transferred to the target. This option is available only for a move.

5-18 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

Page 285: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Delete Transient Waveforms From Source? - Checking this option deletes the transient waveform files from the source after they are successfully transferred to the target. This option is available only for a move.

Source and Target Items

Each transfer (copy or move) consists of a source item and a target item. The fol-lowing table displays the valid targets for the transfer of a source item along with a list of the tabs available in the Options Window:

5-19Copy/Move

Page 286: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Source Target Option Tabs

Area Database, Area List

Structure,Data,Set,External File

Equipment Database,Area List,Area, Equipment List

Structure,Data,Set,External File

Measurement Point Database,Area List,Area,Equipment List, Equipment,Measurement Point List

Structure,Data,Set,External File

Job Equipment,Matching Job List,Matching Global Data Job List

Data, External File

Route Area, Route List

Route,Structure,Data,Set,External File

Analysis Parameter Set Database, Analysis Parameter Set

Set

Alarm Limit Set Database, Alarm Limit Set

Set

Fault Frequency Set Database, Fault Frequency Set List

Set

Predefined Notes Database, Predefined Notes List

N/A

Global Data (Jobs) Equipment,Matching Job List

Data,External File

Global Data (Events) Measurement Point N/A

5-20 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

Page 287: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteTransferring an item causes that item’s children to also be transferred (with consideration to the options set in the tabs of the Options Window). For example, transferring an area also transfers the equip-ment, measurement points, and routes within that area along with the associated analysis parameter sets, alarm limit sets, and fault fre-quency sets.

5-21Copy/Move

Page 288: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Copy/Move Example

Step 1 - Open a source databaseClick the “Open” button on the tool bar or use the “Open Database...” option from the “File” menu. In the Database Selection window, select the source database and click the “OK” button. A window with the structure tree of the source database will be displayed.

Database Selection Window

Step 2 - Open a target databaseClick the “Open” button on the tool bar or use the “Open Database...” option from the “File” menu. In the Database Selection window, select the target database and click the “OK” button. A window with the structure tree of the target database will be displayed.

Step 3 - Select the items to be transferredNavigating through the tree in the source Database Window, select the items that are to be transferred to the target database. The items to be transferred may be selected from either the right or left panes of the source Database Window.

Step 4 - Place the selected items on the clipboardClick the “Copy” button (or the “Cut” button for a move) to place the selected items on the clipboard.

5-22 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

Page 289: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Step 5 - Select the target itemNavigating through the tree in the target Database Window, select the item into which the contents of the clipboard are to be placed. The target item may be selected from either the right or left panes of the target Database Window.

Step 6 - Paste the contents of the clipboardClick the “Paste” button to place the contents of the clipboard into the target data-base.

Step 7 - Specify transfer optionsA dialog box containing one or more tabs will be displayed. This dialog box may be used to customize the transfer. Once you are satisfied with the transfer options, click “OK” to initiate the transfer. A log of the transfer will be displayed in a Previewer window.

Example Transfer Log

5-23Copy/Move

Page 290: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteDatabase Utility now supports moving transient files as illustrated in the illustration “Moving Transient Files”.

Moving Transient Files

5-24 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

Page 291: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Modify Equipment

The Modify Equipment task provides the capability to modify information about equipment stored in an AMS Machinery Manager database. Information may be modified for a single piece or many pieces of equipment by creating filter sets and action sets and then applying those filter sets and action sets to one or more data-bases.

Database Window

Click the “Open” button on the tool bar or use the “Open Database...” option from the “File” menu to open a database. The Database Selection Window will be dis-played with a list of available databases. Select the desired database from the list and then click the “OK” button. The structure tree of the opened database will be dis-played in a window. Navigating through the tree in the Database Window, select the equipment that is to be modified. The equipment selection must be made on the right pane of the Database Window. More than one piece of equipment may be selected for modification.

NoteSelecting an area automatically selects all of the equipment in that area.

Database Window

5-25Modify Equipment

Page 292: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Filter/Actions Window

The left side of the Filter/Actions Window is the filter pane, and the right side is the action pane. The filter pane is used to determine which of the selected equipment is to be modified based on matching values. The action pane is used to specify the new values for the fields to be modified.

Filter/Actions Window

There are two toggle buttons and two delete buttons located at the top of the Filter/Actions Window.

Toggle General - This button determines whether or not the general equipment information parameters are included in the drop-down lists for both the Filter Field and Action Field. If this button is on, the parameters that will be included in the drop-down lists are as follows:

General Equipment Information Parameters

Description

Identifier

Classification

Analysis Group ID Number

Type Code

5-26 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

Page 293: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Toggle Periodic Vibration - This button determines whether or not the periodic vibration parameters are included in the drop-down lists for both the Filter Field and Action Field. If this button is on, the parameters that will be included in the drop-down lists are as follows:

NoteAt least one of the toggle buttons must be selected. Both toggle but-tons may be selected at the same time to allow for all parameters (gen-eral information and periodic vibration) to be included in the drop-down lists.

Delete Row - This button removes the contents of the currently active row. This delete affects either the filter or the action pane, depending on which is active at the time the button is clicked.

Delete All Rows - This button removes the contents of all of the rows in either the filter or the action pane, depending on which is active at the time the button is clicked.

Filter PaneThe filter pane of the Filter/Actions Window has three columns.

Filter Field - This column is a drop-down list of possible parameters that may be used as a filter. Select the parameter from the drop-down list for which the filter is to be created. The parameters that make up this list are determined by the Toggle General and Toggle Periodic Vibration buttons.

Periodic Vibration Parameters

Enter Speed Only Once?

Enter Load Only Once?

Speed Type Code

FPM-to-RPM Factor

Reference Speed

Reference Load

Fixed Tach Location?

5-27Modify Equipment

Page 294: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Op - This column is a drop-down list of possible operations that may be used to create the filter. The list of valid operations will be determined by the corre-sponding Filter Field. Examples of operations include “!=” (not equal to) and “<=” (less than or equal to).

Value - This column is the actual value of the corresponding Filter Field that deter-mines which equipment will be modified from the selections made in the Database Window. A drop-down list may be available depending upon which Filter Field was selected. Otherwise, type in the value that is to be matched when determining which equipment is to be modified.

The available drop-down lists for the “Value” column in both the filter pane and the action pane are as follows:

NoteThe question mark (“?”) wildcard may be used when building a filter. It is valid only in the Value column and only when a drop-down list is not available. The question mark wildcard represents any single char-acter. Examples are as follows:

M1? - anything with three characters that begins with “M1”

M?? - anything with three characters that begins with “M”

Action PaneThe action pane of the Filter/Actions Window has two columns.

Filter/Action Field Possible Values

Type Code Immobile, Constant Speed/Constant Load, Variable Speed/Constant Load, Constant Speed/Variable Load, Variable Speed/Variable Load

Enter Speed Only Once? Yes, No

Enter Load Only Once? Yes, No

Speed Type Code RPM, FPM

Fixed Tach Location? Yes, No

5-28 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

Page 295: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Action Field - This column is a drop-down list of possible parameters that may be selected for modification. Select the parameter from the drop-down list for which the modification is to be made. The parameters that make up this list are deter-mined by the Toggle General and Toggle Periodic Vibration buttons.

Value - This column is the actual value to which the corresponding Action Field is to be modified. A drop-down list may be available depending upon which Action Field was selected. Otherwise, type in the value to which the corresponding Action Field is to be modified. See the description for the “Value” column in the filter pane for a table of available drop-down lists.

NoteMore than one filter and action may be specified for any one modifi-cation. The combined rows of filters and the combined rows of actions will act as a Boolean “and” to create a filter set and an action set. In other words, all of the filter rows must be true in order for the modifications in all of the action rows to be made to the selected equipment.

Execute the ActionsWhen the filter set and action set have been built and the equipment to be modi-fied has been selected in the Database Window, click the “Execute” button or use the “Execute Actions” option from the “File” menu to make the modifications. The modifications will be made, and a log of the actions will be displayed in a Previewer window.

5-29Modify Equipment

Page 296: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Modify Equipment Example

Step 1 - Open a databaseClick the “Open” button on the tool bar or use the “Open Database...” option from the “File” menu. In the Database Selection window, select the database that is to be opened and click the “OK” button. A window with the structure tree of the selected database will be displayed.

Database Selection Window

Step 2 - Select the equipment to be modifiedNavigating through the tree in the Database Window, select the equipment that is to be modified. The equipment must be selected from the right pane of the Data-base Window.

Step 3 - Indicate general and/or periodic vibration Click the “Toggle General” and the “Toggle Periodic Vibration” buttons to indicate whether or not the general equipment information parameters and/or the peri-odic vibration parameters will be included in the drop-down lists for the Filter Field and Action Field. By default, the “Toggle General” button is on and the “Toggle Periodic Vibration” button is off.

5-30 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

Page 297: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Step 4 - Build the filter setSelect a parameter from the drop-down list in the “Filter Field” column. Select an operation from the drop-down list in the “Op” column. If a drop-down list is avail-able for the “Value” column, select a value. If a drop-down list is not available for the “Value” column, enter the desired value.

Repeat this step for as many rows as necessary to build the desired filter set. The combined rows of filters will be treated as a Boolean “and” to create the filter set. In other words, all of the filter rows must be true in order for the modifications to be made to the selected equipment.

Example Filter Set

Step 5 - Build the action setSelect an action from the drop-down list in the “Action Field” column. If a drop-down list is available for the “Value” column, select a value. If a drop-down list is not available for the “Value” column, enter the desired value.

Repeat this step for as many rows as necessary to build the desired action set. The combined rows of actions will be treated as a Boolean “and” to create the action set. In other words, the modifications in all of the action rows will be made to the selected equipment that matches all of the filter rows.

Example Action Set

5-31Modify Equipment

Page 298: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Step 6 - ExecuteClick the “Execute” button to begin the equipment modifications. A log of the modifications will be displayed in a CSIView window.

Example Modification Log

Step 7 - Repeat as necessaryIf necessary, you may open another database and apply the same filter and action set. Or, the filter and action sets may be changed to make different equipment modifications.

NoteThe order in which a database is opened, the filter set is built, and the action set is built does not matter. However, all three steps must occur prior to executing the actions.

5-32 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

Page 299: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Modify Measurement Points

The Modify Measurement Points task provides the capability to modify informa-tion about measurement points stored in an AMS Machinery Manager database. Information may be modified for one or more measurement points by creating filter sets and action sets and then applying those filter sets and action sets to one or more databases.

Database Window

Click the “Open” button on the tool bar or use the “Open Database...” option from the “File” menu to open a database. The Database Selection Window will be dis-played with a list of available databases. Select the desired database from the list and then click the “OK” button. The structure tree of the opened database will be dis-played in a window. Navigating through the tree in the Database Window, select the measurement points that are to be modified. The measurement points selection must be made on the right pane of the Database Window. More than one measure-ment point may be selected for modification.

5-33Modify Measurement Points

Page 300: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteSelecting an area automatically selects all of the measurement points in that area. Similarly, selecting a piece of equipment automatically selects all of the measurement points in that equipment.

Database Window

Filter/Actions Window

The left side of the Filter/Actions Window is the filter pane, and the right side is the action pane. The filter pane is used to determine which of the selected measure-ment points are to be modified based on matching values. The action pane is used to specify the new values for the fields to be modified.

Filter/Actions Window

5-34 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

Page 301: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

There are six toggle buttons and two delete buttons located at the top of the Filter/Actions Window.

Toggle Pvb General - This button determines whether or not the general periodic vibration parameters are included in the drop-down lists for both the Filter Field and Action Field. If this button is on, the parameters that will be included in the drop-down lists are as follows:

General Periodic Vibration Parameters

Measurement Point Identifier

Measurement Description

Units Type Code

Units

RPM at Measurement Point

Analysis Parameter Set ID

Alarm Limit Set ID

Monitoring Schedule (in days)

# of Data Values in Statistical Calculations

5-35Modify Measurement Points

Page 302: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Toggle Pvb Sensor/Signal - This button determines whether or not the periodic vibration sensor/signal parameters are included in the drop-down lists for both the Filter Field and Action Field. If this button is on, the parameters that will be included in the drop-down lists are as follows:

Toggle Fault Frequency - This button determines whether or not the fault fre-quency set parameters are included in the drop-down lists for both the Filter Field and Action Field. If this button is on, the parameters that will be included in the drop-down lists are as follows:

Periodic Vibration Sensor/Signal Parameters

Provide Sensor Power?

Sensor Sensitivity (in v/eu)

DC Offset (in volts)

Signal Group Number

Signal Channel Number

Full Scale Range

HFD Full Scale Range

Lowest Valid Signal Level

Highest Valid Signal Level

Fault Frequency Set Parameters

Fault Frequency Item #1

Fault Frequency Item #2

Fault Frequency Item #3

Fault Frequency Item #4

Fault Frequency Item #5

Fault Frequency Item #6

Fault Frequency Item #7

5-36 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

Page 303: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Toggle Pvb Alarm - This button determines whether or not the periodic vibration alarm limit parameters are included in the drop-down lists for both the Filter Field and Action Field. If this button is on, the parameters that will be included in the drop-down lists are as follows:

Toggle Oil General - This button determines whether or not the general oil param-eters are included in the drop-down lists for both the Filter Field and Action Field. If this button is on, the parameters that will be included in the drop-down lists are as follows:

Periodic Vibration Alarm Limit Parameters

Alarm Type Code

Fault Value

Alert Value

Weak Side Alert Value

Baseline Ratio

Maximum Deviations

General Oil Parameters

Measurement Point Identifier

Measurement Description

Lab Unit ID

Sampling Schedule

Analysis Parameter Set ID

Alarm Limit Set ID

# of Data Values in Statistical Calculations

5-37Modify Measurement Points

Page 304: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Toggle Thermography General - This button determines whether or not the gen-eral thermography parameters are included in the drop-down lists for both the Filter Field and Action Field. If this button is on, the parameters that will be included in the drop-down lists are as follows:

NoteAt least one of the toggle buttons must be selected. More than one of the “Toggle Pvb General”, “Toggle Pvb Sensor/Signal”, “Toggle Fault Frequency”, and “Toggle Pvb Alarm” buttons may be selected at the same time to allow for more parameters to be included in the drop-down lists. The “Toggle Oil General” and the “Toggle Thermography General” buttons may only be selected by themselves.

Delete Row - This button removes the contents of the currently active row. This delete affects either the filter or the action pane, depending on which is active at the time the button is clicked.

Delete All Rows - This button removes the contents of all of the rows in either the filter or the action pane, depending on which is active at the time the button is clicked.

Filter PaneThe filter pane of the Filter/Actions Window has three columns.

General Thermography Parameters

Measurement Point Identifier

Measurement Point Description

Monitoring Schedule

Reference Voltage

Reference Current

Location Code

Instruction Code

Priority Code

5-38 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

Page 305: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Filter Field - This column is a drop-down list of possible parameters that may be used as a filter. Select the parameter from the drop-down list for which the filter is to be created. The parameters that make up this list are determined by the toggle buttons.

Op - This column is a drop-down list of possible operations that may be used to create the filter. The list of valid operations will be determined by the corre-sponding Filter Field. Examples of operations include “!=” (not equal to) and “<=” (less than or equal to).

Value - This column is the actual value of the corresponding Filter Field that deter-mines which measurement points will be modified from the selections made in the Database Window. A drop-down list may be available depending upon which Filter Field was selected. Otherwise, type in the value that is to be matched when deter-mining which measurement points are to be modified.

The available drop-down lists for the “Value” column are as follows:

Filter/Action Field Possible Values

Units Type Code Acceleration<--Acceleration, Velocity<--Acceleration, Velocity<--Velocity, Displacement<--Acceleration, Displacement<--Velocity, Displacement<--Displacement, General Dynamic, Static/DC Input, Keypad Input, Temperature, Sound Pressure, Current, Flux-Low Frequency, Flux-Slot Pass, Shaft Voltage, Shaft Current

Provide Sensor Power? Yes, No

5-39Modify Measurement Points

Page 306: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

If the “Toggle Fault Frequency” button is on, you may select up to seven Fault Fre-quency Items. The “Value” column for the Fault Frequency Items contains an ellipse (“...”) button. Clicking on this button will display the Fault Frequency Infor-mation Window, which is used to specify details about the Fault Frequency Item.

Fault Frequency Information Window

NoteThe question mark (“?”) wildcard may be used when building a filter. It is valid only in the Value column and only when a drop-down list is not available. The question mark wildcard represents any single char-acter. Examples are as follows:

M1? - anything with three characters that begins with “M1”

M?? - anything with three characters that begins with “M”

Action PaneThe action pane of the Filter/Actions Window has two columns.

Action Field - This column is a drop-down list of possible parameters that may be selected for modification. Select the parameter from the drop-down list for which the modification is to be made. The parameters that make up this list are deter-mined by the toggle buttons.

Value - This column is the actual value to which the corresponding Action Field is to be modified. A drop-down list may be available depending upon which Action Field was selected. Otherwise, type in the value to which the corresponding Action Field is to be modified. See the description for the “Value” column in the filter pane for a table of available drop-down lists.

5-40 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

Page 307: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteMore than one filter and action may be specified for any one modifi-cation. The combined rows of filters and the combined rows of actions will act as a Boolean “and” to create a filter set and an action set. In other words, all of the filter rows must be true in order for the modifications in all of the action rows to be made to the selected mea-surement points.

Execute the ActionsWhen the filter set and action set have been built and the measurement points to be modified have been selected in the Database Window, click the “Execute” button or use the “Execute Actions” option from the “File” menu to make the mod-ifications. The modifications will be made, and a log of the actions will be displayed in a CSIView window.

5-41Modify Measurement Points

Page 308: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Modify Measurement Points Example

Step 1 - Open a databaseClick the “Open” button on the tool bar or use the “Open Database...” option from the “File” menu. In the Database Selection window, select the database that is to be opened and click the “OK” button. A window with the structure tree of the selected database will be displayed.

Database Selection Window

Step 2 - Select the measurement points to be modifiedNavigating through the tree in the Database Window, select the measuremnent points that are to be modified. The measurement points must be selected from the right pane of the Database Window.

Step 3 - Use the toggle buttonsClick the toggle buttons to indicate which parameters will be included in the drop-down lists for the Filter Field and Action Field. By default, the “Toggle Pvb General” button is on and the rest of the toggle buttons are off.

Step 4 - Build the filter setSelect a parameter from the drop-down list in the “Filter Field” column. Select an operation from the drop-down list in the “Op” column. If a drop-down list is avail-able for the “Value” column, select a value. If a drop-down list is not available for the “Value” column, enter the desired value.

5-42 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

Page 309: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Repeat this step for as many rows as necessary to build the desired filter set. The combined rows of filters will be treated as a Boolean “and” to create the filter set. In other words, all of the filter rows must be true in order for the modifications to be made to the selected measurement points.

Example Filter Set

Step 5 - Build the action setSelect an action from the drop-down list in the “Action Field” column. If a drop-down list is available for the “Value” column, select a value. If a drop-down list is not available for the “Value” column, enter the desired value.

Repeat this step for as many rows as necessary to build the desired action set. The combined rows of actions will be treated as a Boolean “and” to create the action set. In other words, the modifications in all of the action rows will be made to the selected measurement points that match all of the filter rows.

Example Action Set

5-43Modify Measurement Points

Page 310: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Step 6 - ExecuteClick the “Execute” button to begin the measurement points modifications. A log of the modifications will be displayed in a Previewer window.

Example Modification Log

Step 7 - Repeat as necessaryIf necessary, you may open another database and apply the same filter and action set. Or, the filter and action sets may be changed to make different measurement points modifications.

5-44 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

Page 311: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteThe order in which a database is opened, the filter set is built, and the action set is built does not matter. However, all three steps must occur prior to executing the actions.

5-45Modify Measurement Points

Page 312: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

5-46 Database Utility Functions - DBUTLY

Page 313: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Chapter 6

Manual Data Entry - MANLOG

The MANLOG program allows keyboard entry of trend data into the AMS Machinery Manager database. This allows data collected by means other than the Model CSI 2130, CSI 2120 or CSI 2117 and Model 21xx series machinery analyzers to be used for trend analysis. Also, MANLOG can be used to correct erroneous data, after is has been stored in the database.

The trend data within the database may be manipulated in one of the following four ways:

Append - Trend data may be appended to the chronological end of the database. Date and time checks are performed to maintain the consis-tency of the database before data are allowed to be appended to the database file.

Insert - Trend data may be inserted into the database between existing trend measurements.

Revise - Existing trend data may be updated by an actual value and/or by date and time. If the date or time is changed, the measurements will be reordered where necessary.

Delete - Existing trend measurements may be removed from the data-base. This is not a reversible option.

Caution!The MANLOG program provides a great deal of power and freedom to alter the database. Changes in the data will affect reliability maintenance predictions. Therefore, Emerson strongly recommends that you backup your database before attempting to alter any data with the functions of MANLOG. This backup pro-vides a reference point to return to in case of undesired results.

6-1

Page 314: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteWithin Manlog, references are made to process variables in several places. The term process variable refers to measurement points whose unit type code is defined as either Static/DC, temperature, or keypad. These measurement points always store at most a single overall trend value, since they cannot reference an analysis parameter set. Thus, altering trend data for process variables only for a given machine will generate a list that contains only the points whose unit type code is static/DC, temperature, or keypad. In this mode, you may only alter trend data associated with these points.

6-2 Manual Data Entry - MANLOG

Page 315: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Chapter 7

Route Management- ROUTE

1

A route is a list of equipment and measurement points that have been selected from all of the equipment in an area. This list is arranged in such a manner as to provide an efficient path (route) for the operator to follow when collecting data. The route also instructs the machinery analyzer how to collect and store data. All information transferred to the machinery analyzer from AMS Machinery Manager must be in the form of a route.

A single route or a number of routes (depending on the analyzer’s memory capacity) can be downloaded into the machinery analyzer.

The Route Management Program (ROUTE) is used to create and manage routes. All equipment and measurement points of a route must be from the same area; however, routes may group equipment in any logical manner such as equipment located on the same floor, equipment classified with a particular system, etc.

This capability to group equipment may also be used with other AMS Machinery Manager program modules. For example, the ROUTE program can group similar equipment for:

Analysis with Diagnostic Plotting (PLOTDATA) or Automated fault Diag-nostics (NSpectr)

Reporting with Exceptions Reporting (EXPORT)

Global data management with Database Utility Functions (DBUTLY)

Routes can also be generated while using the EXPORT program, and ROUTE can be used to edit and modify these routes, if necessary.

7-1

Page 316: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Routes can also facilitate data management, i.e., deleting spectra for all measure-ment points in a route or plotting spectra for all measurement points in a route. Creating (and deleting) routes will not affect database structure or stored data.

NoteRoutes do not affect the definitions of equipment and measurement points in the other AMS Machinery Manager programs. Routes can be created, modified, and/or deleted without causing changes in the definitions within the database.

7-2 Route Management- ROUTE

Page 317: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Route Limitations

When creating or modifying a route, observe the following limitations:

• A maximum of 50 routes may be assigned per area.

• Each piece of equipment may contain up to 144 points.

• Each route may contain up to 1040 points.

In addition, the route (or routes) to be loaded into the machinery analyzer should be designed so that the amount of stored data does not exceed the memory capacity of the analyzer.

Memory usage is determined by many factors, including the total number of equip-ment and measurement points, the number of spectra and/or waveforms that will be stored, the number of frequency lines specified for lines of resolution, etc. Therefore, the maximum size and number of routes that can be loaded into the analyzer per collecting session will usually have to be determined by trial and error.

The last line of the analyzer’s measurement point display indicates the amount of remaining memory that is available for data storage. When the percentage is zero, the memory is full and the analyzer can store no more data. If this should happen during the process of collecting data, the route can be completed by first dumping the existing data into the computer. Next, reload the route into the analyzer, and continue taking data on the remaining points.

7-3

Page 318: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Creating A New Route

2

To create a new route, select Create A New Route from the Route Management commands Available menu.

Select the desired area from the Area List menu and click the OK button to advance to the next menu.

Route Definition

7-4 Route Management- ROUTE

Page 319: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Route Definition Tab

Route Description: - The Route Description field is used to identify the route and may contain up to 14 alphanumeric characters.

Route Creator: - Enter the initials (up to four alphanumeric characters) of the person creating the route.

Construct Route by: - A new route may be created using one of the three following methods:

• Selecting one piece of equipment at a time — This option provides a menu where equipment (along with their measurement points) is individually selected to be assigned to the route.

• Copy an existing route — This option provides a list of existing routes, one of which may be selected to be copied, in its entirety, to the new route.

• Using the entire area — This option places all of the equipment in the selected area into the new route.

Route Purpose - Type in text that describes the purpose or other relevant informa-tion about this route to distinguish it from other routes. Examples include:

• Text to distinguish a temporary route, such as “Bearings in alert status in the North Wing” from the normal route.

• Text to identify the person responsible for collecting data on the route, such as “Bill Smith’s monthly fan route.”

• Text to identify routes with implementations of special technologies such as “Motor shaft current/voltage route.”

7-5Creating A New Route

Page 320: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Collection Options Tab

ROUTE Collection Options

Survey Collection Schedule - Represents how often data on the route should be collected (in days).

Set Next Spectra as Reference — select from the following:

• If Point is Armed — the reference spectra should be spectra taken when the equipment is in good condition. Normally, the next spectra are only set as the reference spectra if the points are armed (points can be armed in Stored Data management program, DATMGR).

• If Point has no Reference — Select this option to set the next spectra as a ref-erence (if a point has no reference). Choosing this option effectively elimi-nates the need to arm these points in the Stored Data Management program (DATMGR).

Caution!The If Point has no Reference option must be used with care to avoid estab-lishing bad reference data which mask unreliable equipment conditions.

• Regardless of Point Condition — Select this option to use the next spectra as reference regardless of the point condition. Choosing this option effectively eliminates the need to arm these points in the Stored Data Management program (DATMGR).

7-6 Route Management- ROUTE

Page 321: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Caution!The Regardless of Point Condition option must be used with care to avoid estab-lishing bad reference data which mask unreliable equipment conditions. For example, if a piece of equipment has been repaired and returned to service, it is essential to verify that the equipment is functioning properly before a new refer-ence spectrum is acquired with this option.

Default Data Storage Parameters: - instructs the analyzer to store spectral and waveform data in one of three ways:

• No Data Stored — The analyzer will not automatically store spectral and/or waveform data.

NoteEven when the No Data Stored option is selected, you can still acquire spectral and waveform data for a point by using the Analyzer’s Ana-lyze/Store Data function immediately after acquiring data for the point.

• Store Data on High Status — The analyzer will automatically store spectral and/or waveform data for each measurement point only when a Hi alarm status is indicated.“Hi Status” is defined in CSICOM, under Route Load Setup. Here the user specifies which alarm level (defined in Database Setup Management - DBASE) causes the analyzer to display the Hi-Alarm 1 status (see the VibView Technical Reference, Chapter 1 Analyzer Communications - CSICOM for more information).

• Store All Data — The analyzer will automatically store spectral and/or wave-form data for each measurement point.

7-7Creating A New Route

Page 322: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Technology Flags Tab

This page of the setup windows allows you to specify which technologies are to be included in the new route. Check the associated box to include points from other technologies.

3

NoteOil, Online, and thermographic points are not downloaded to the machinery analyzer. Oil, Online, and thermographic routes are used primarily for reporting and diagnostics. For more information on oil route and thermographic route data, see the OilView and Infranal-ysis® on-line help and documentation.

7-8 Route Management- ROUTE

Page 323: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Selecting Equipment

After setting up the Create Route Number menu, click the OK button to advance to the Select Equipment to Add to the Route menu.

4

A piece of equipment is selected by highlighting the equipment description with the up/down arrow keys and then clicking the OK button. The equipment descrip-tion will be removed from the list, indicating that it has been selected. A running total at the top of the window keeps track of the number of pieces of equipment and measurement points that will be added to the route.

Update Route, Ignore Change - After all of the desired equipment is selected, click the Update Route command to write the route into the database. Click the Ignore Change command to ignore the changes made to this menu.

Pick-points -If you construct a route by selecting one piece of equipment at a time, the Pick-points command allows for only certain measurement points to be added to the route. Check the associated box to add the measurement point (or points) to the route.

After selecting the equipment to go into the new route, the new route will be cre-ated. You will then be taken back to the Route Management Functions menu.

7-9Creating A New Route

Page 324: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Auto-Build

This option (available on the Main Options menu) automatically builds a route for every area in your database. These routes will contain all of the points on all of the equipment defined in each area.

Auto Route Setup Menu

7-10 Route Management- ROUTE

Page 325: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

When the Auto-Build process is complete, a listing of the routes will be displayed.

5

7-11Creating A New Route

Page 326: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Rename Old Routes

This option may be used to change the name of an existing route or routes. After selecting Rename Old Routes, a window will list all of the available routes within the currently selected area. Modifications may be made to the route names on this list as desired.

6

After making the desired modifications, click the OK button to store the new names, or click the Cancel command to disregard all changes and return to the Route Management Functions menu.

7-12 Route Management- ROUTE

Page 327: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Editing and Deleting Routes

Edit An Existing Route

This command is used to modify an existing route. After selecting Edit An Existing Route, all of the routes under the currently selected area will be displayed in the tree window.

7

Route Info - Click this button on the function bar to see a summary listing of parameters for the selected route.

7-13Editing and Deleting Routes

Page 328: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Select the route to be modified on the tree and then click the OK button to advance to the Route Edit Functions Available menu.

8

This menu contains five sub-functions that can be used to modify the selected route.

NoteAccessing and changing these options will not affect data that has pre-viously been stored on the measurement points in the AMS Machinery Manager database.

Selecting any of the first four items displays an equipment list for the selected route. As equipment is added or deleted from a route, running totals are displayed at the top of the list to track the number of pieces of equipment and measurement points assigned to the route.

NoteFor sub-functions that require equipment selection, highlight the desired equipment description using the up/down arrow keys and then click the OK button.

7-14 Route Management- ROUTE

Page 329: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

The last item, Edit Route Parameters, displays menu options to globally change Route Definition parameters and scheduling parameters for an entire route. This option also allows you to change Data Storage Options and Reference Spectra options for equipment added to the route.

Add New Equipment To Route — Equipment may be selected from the displayed list and added to the route. This list contains equipment that are defined for the current area but not presently assigned to the route being modified.

The program will not allow a piece of equipment to be added that is already in the route, nor will it let a piece of equipment be added that has no measurement points defined. The new equipment and points are added to the end of the route list.

Use the Update Route function to permanently save these changes.

Delete Equipment From Route — To delete equipment from a Route, select this item on the menu to display the tree. From the right pane of the tree, select the piece of equipment you want to delete from the route and click “OK.” Now select “Update Route” to complete the operation and return to the Route Edit Functions Available menu.

NoteDeleting a piece of equipment from a route will not cause data for that equipment and its associated measurement points to be lost or deleted from the AMS Machinery Manager database.

Insert Equipment Into Route — Equipment may be selected from the displayed list of equipment that are not presently assigned to the route and then placed into the route at any desired location.

An existing piece of equipment is first selected from the route in order to specify the desired location. The new equipment is then automatically inserted into the route ahead of the existing equipment.

Use the Update Route function to permanently save these changes.

7-15Editing and Deleting Routes

Page 330: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Modify Order Of Measurement Points — This option is used to change the order of a piece of equipment’s measurement points as they appear in the route. After selecting the desired equipment, the points may then be renumbered in the pre-ferred sequence by entering the new order number after the three-character mea-surement point ID. A zero (0) may be entered to remove an individual point from the route. (A point removed from the route will still remain in the database.) Click the Update Route button to update the route.

NoteThis option is an effective method of updating a route that contains specific equipment on which measurement points have been added or deleted because it allows you to see all defined points, and whether or not they are enabled.

Edit Route Parameters — This option enables you to edit the route parameters.

Route Definition tab - Allows you to globally change the Route Creator and the Route Purpose for an entire route.

Route Parameters tab - Allows you to globally change the Survey Collection Schedule and Skipped Grace Period for the entire route.

Data Storage tab - Allows you to change the default data storage option for the route. This will be applied only to pieces of equipment that are added to the route.

Update Route, Ignore Change - Click the Update Route command to write the edited route into the database. Click the Ignore Change command to ignore the changes made to this menu.

7-16 Route Management- ROUTE

Page 331: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Delete An Old Route

This command is used to delete unwanted routes from the database. Selecting Delete An Old Route will provide a list of routes that are available under the cur-rently selected area. Highlight the route to be deleted with the up/down arrow keys and click the OK button. The computer will then list the route to be deleted and ask “Are you Absolutely Sure?” Answer “Yes” to delete the route. A “No” answer will abort the deletion process.

9

NoteDeleting routes will not affect database structure or stored data.

Route Info - Click this button on the function bar to see a summary listing of parameters for the selected route.

7-17Editing and Deleting Routes

Page 332: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Modify Route Storage

The Modify Route Storage option provides seven sub-functions that modify the way spectral and waveform data are to be stored by the machinery analyzer. By stepping through each of three menus, you can modify data storage options for the entire route, for an individual piece of equipment, and for an individual point. The storage method for each measurement point may be reviewed by using Print Route Summary.

NoteWhen initial measurements are made, it is desirable to store all data on all equipment. However, as a good history on a piece of equip-ment is developed, it may be more efficient to store spectral and time waveform data only when alarm levels are exceeded.

Select a route from the list of routes and click the OK button. You will then advance to the Route Storage commands Available menu.

10

7-18 Route Management- ROUTE

Page 333: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Modify Route Storage for an Entire Route The first six sub-functions of the Modify Route Storage option modify the data storage procedure for all of the equipment in the route:

Save Spectra On All Measurement Points — The analyzer will automatically store spectral data for each measurement point in the route. This is the most common option for normal data collection.

Save Spectra On Alarm Status Only — The analyzer will automatically store spec-tral data for each measurement point in the route only when an Alarm condition is present. “Alarm” is defined in CSICOM, under Route Load Setup. Here the user specifies which alarm level (defined in DBASE) causes the analyzer to display the Hi-Alarm or VIB alarm status (see VibView Technical Reference, Chapter 1 Analyzer Com-munications - CSICOM for more information). Spectra will now be stored only if an alarm is displayed in the analyzer.

Caution!You should feel confident in the alarm levels defined in DBASE before using this option. Important data could possibly be ignored if alarm levels are improperly set.

Eliminate Storage Of All Spectra — The analyzer will not automatically store spec-tral data. No spectral data will be collected when this option is selected.

Save Waveforms On All Measurement Points — The analyzer will automatically store waveform data for each measurement point in the route.

Save Waveforms On Alarm Status Only — The analyzer will automatically store waveform data for each measurement point in the route only when an Alarm con-dition is present. “Alarm” is defined in CSICOM, under Route Load Setup. Here the user specifies which alarm level (defined in DBASE) causes the analyzer to dis-play the Hi-Alarm or VIB alarm status (see VibView Technical Reference, Chapter 1 Ana-lyzer Communications - CSICOM for more information). Spectra will now be stored only if an alarm is displayed in the analyzer.

Caution!You should feel confident in the alarm levels defined in DBASE before using this option. Important data could possibly be ignored if alarm levels are improperly set.

7-19Modify Route Storage

Page 334: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Eliminate Storage Of All Waveforms — The analyzer will not automatically store waveform data. No waveform data will be collected when this option is selected. This option is sometimes chosen after baseline waveforms are established. Although no waveform data will be stored, computer memory will be conserved.

The remaining menu option, Specify Storage on Each Equipment, allows you to modify the data storage procedure for an individual piece of equipment as described below:

Modify Route Storage for an Individual Equipment Specify Storage on Each Equipment — This menu option allows you to modify the data storage procedure for an individual piece of equipment. After selecting a piece of equipment that is assigned to the current route, the previous six sub-func-tions (see “Modify Route Storage for an Entire Route” on page 7-19) are again avail-able though they only affect the selected equipment. These sub-functions can then be used to modify the data storage procedure for all of the equipment’s measure-ment points.

11

The last option, Specify Storage On Individual Measurement Points which allows you to modify the storage options for an individual point, is described as follows:

7-20 Route Management- ROUTE

Page 335: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Modify Route Storage for an Individual Point Specify Storage On Individual Measurement Points - This option allows the user to modify the data storage for an individual measurement point. Select this option and click the OK button to display the following menu:

12

The “spectra/waveform” field, following the three-character measurement point ID, indicates the desired storage method via the following letter codes:

NoteOne instance where this feature might be used is when only wave-form data was desired on the first point of each inboard/outboard bearing. This would give the user vital waveform data while con-serving disk space.

St Store all data.

Hi Store data on Hi alarm status only.

No Store no data.

7-21Modify Route Storage

Page 336: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Update Route, Ignore Change - Click the Update Route command to write the edited route into the database. Click the Ignore Change command to ignore the changes made to this menu.

Point Desc - Clicking this button on the function bar displays a listing of all points defined for the selected equipment.

7-22 Route Management- ROUTE

Page 337: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Print A Route Summary

The Print A Route Summary command provides a listing of all of the equipment and measurement points on a selected route. This feature may be used to examine the structure of the entire route after creation or modification. The equipment and their measurement points are listed in the same order as they will appear on the machinery analyzer.

13

The spectral/waveform data storage method for each measurement point is indi-cated after its ID using the following letter codes:

St Store all data.

Hi Store data on Hi alarm status only.

No Store no data.

7-23Print A Route Summary

Page 338: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Reorder Route List

This option enables you to change the sequential order of routes as they are cur-rently stored in the selected area.

14

After selecting a route for the new order listing, the following commands will be available.

Display - After reordering the list of routes, this command displays the new order for routes.

Undo - Using the Undo command ignores all changes and returns the route order to the original list.

7-24 Route Management- ROUTE

Page 339: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Define Multiple Route Load (MRL)

This option allows you to group a number of routes together, which in turn allows you to load multiple routes into the data collector in a single step. These routes may come from separate stations and even separate databases. This requires specifying a file name for the MRL and the routes to be grouped.

1. . . Double-click on DEFINE Multiple Route Load in the Route Management Functions dialog box. A message box appears.

Route Management Functions dialog box

Message box

2. . . Highlight Create new MRL File and click on the OK button to begin creating a new Multiple Route File. A window appears asking for you to type in a name for the new Multiple Route Load.

7-25Define Multiple Route Load (MRL)

Page 340: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Enter a name for the MRL file in the text box.

Once you have typed in a name, click the OK button. A dialog box appears asking you to select a database from which you will begin selecting your routes. Select a database and click on the OK button. A window appears showing a tree of the data-base you have selected.

Database tree window

3. . . Click on an area in the left side of the window. In the right side, the routes set up under those areas appear. Double-click on the route or routes from that area you want. Select other areas and repeat the process until done.

4. . . When finished, click on the Finished button. A message box appears asking if you want to select route(s) from another database. Select Yes, and repeat steps 1 - 4 or select No to complete the process of creating the .mrl file.

7-26 Route Management- ROUTE

Page 341: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteYou can also select Edit Existing MRL File to edit a Multiple Route File already created, Delete Existing MRL File to delete a Multiple Route File already created, or Print Existing MRL File to print a Multiple Route File. (These files have a .mrl tag on the end of the file name.)

After you select routes and the MRL file has been stored, you can use CSICOM to load the entire group of routes into the data collector by selecting the MRL file-name.

The preparations necessary for using the Multiple Route Load (MRL) feature are broken down into three requirements: CSICOM program, a Model 1010 or Model 21xx analyzer (see note), and a special *.MRL file format. Once these require-ments are met, much of MRL is automated and should operate successfully.

Using Data Transfer

The CSICOM program includes an option for you to determine how informa-tional, warning or error messages are to be displayed with the Error MSG Logging option. This option should be set to Messages W/O Wait when using the MRL option. Timing is critical to the MRL option since the entire procedure is auto-mated. A delay while waiting for you to push a key at a message may cause the com-munications to be interrupted. See the CSICOM chapter for more information.

You should also increase the number of retires for transmit and timeout to allow for the extra time required to access the MRL file. These values may be accessed from the Communication Setup option in CSICOM. This increase will expand the range during which successful communication can occur, especially if you are using a net-worked system. See the Data Transfer chapter for more information.

7-27Define Multiple Route Load (MRL)

Page 342: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Using MRL with the Machinery Analyzer

When CSICOM determines the presence of MRL files (*.MRL) with the correct format, the MRL option becomes available in the machinery analyzer. After you ask for a route load, the window that normally enables you to pick a database will now include the Multiple Route Load option (you must have “Database Name Support” set to “Yes”).

If this option is selected, a list of MRL files will be shown on the machinery analyzer. If there is only one MRL defined, it is automatically chosen by the machinery ana-lyzer. When you pick a MRL, all routes associated with that MRL file will be down-loaded to the machinery analyzer. These routes may be on any station in any database.

7-28 Route Management- ROUTE

Page 343: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Chapter 8

Previewer

Previewer is a text editor that displays information created by other AMS Machinery Manager programs. You can use Previewer to edit, save, and print infor-mation. Most AMS Machinery Manager programs can be set to automatically send output information to Previewer.

For example, you can set PLOTDATA or Analysis to automatically send plots to a new Previewer document.

Access it on the “Tools” tab, in the “Document/Reporting” sidebar item.

1

8-1

Page 344: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Working with Documents

Creating a New Document1. . . On the File menu, click New.2. . . Select the file type you want to create:

• Word 6 - select this option to create a Word for Windows version 6 docu-ment.

• Rich Text Document - select this option to create a Rich Text Format (RTF) document. Documents in RTF format can be opened with a variety of word processing applications while retaining their original formatting informa-tion.

• Text Document - select this option to create a document with text only. This option supports only limited document formatting capabilities.

Saving Changes to a DocumentUse one of the following methods:

• On the File menu, click Save. Use this option to save a file with its existing name and location. The first time you save a file, you must specify a file name and location.

• On the File menu, click Save As. Use this option to save an existing docu-ment with a new name. You can also specify a new file location.

Opening a Document1. . . On the File menu, click Open.2. . . In the Look In box, click the drive that contains the document you want to

open.3. . . Below the Look In box, click the folder that contains the document you want

to open.4. . . Click the document’s name or type it in the File Name box. If you don’t see

the document in the box, click All Files in the Files of Type list.

NoteTo open a document you opened recently, click its name at the bottom of the File menu.

8-2 Previewer

Page 345: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Setting Up the Previewer Window

Setting Display Options1. . . On the View Menu, click Options.2. . . To set word wrap, or to set the display of the Toolbar, Format bar, Ruler, or

Status Bar, click a tab to choose a file type.To choose which measurement units are displayed, click the Options tab.

3. . . Change the options as appropriate.4. . . When you are finished, click OK.

Displaying the ToolbarOn the View menu, click Toolbar. When the command has a check mark next to it, the toolbar is visible.

Displaying the Format BarOn the View menu, click Format Bar. When the command has a check mark next to it, the format bar is visible.

Displaying the RulerOn the View menu, click Ruler. When the command has a check mark next to it, the ruler is visible.

Displaying the Status BarOn the View menu, click Status Bar. When the command has a check mark next to it, the status bar is visible.

8-3Setting Up the Previewer Window

Page 346: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Working with Text

Selecting all the Text in a DocumentOn the Edit menu, click Select All.

Copying Information1. . . Select the information you want to copy by highlighting it.2. . . On the Edit menu, click Copy.3. . . Click the place where you want to put the information.4. . . On the Edit menu, click Paste. The information appears in its new location.

Moving Information1. . . Select the information you want to move by highlighting it. 2. . . On the Edit menu, click Cut.3. . . Click the place where you want to put the information.4. . . On the Edit menu, click Paste. The Information is removed from its original

location and appears in its new location.

Undoing Your Last ActionOn the Edit menu, click Undo.

Deleting Text1. . . Select the text you want to delete. 2. . . To remove the text so that you can place it in another part of the document,

click Edit, and then click Cut.To remove text entirely from the document, press the Del (Delete) key.

NoteTo cancel a selection, click anywhere in the document. To undo a deletion, click Edit, and then click Undo.

8-4 Previewer

Page 347: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Searching for Text1. . . In the document, click where you want to start searching.2. . . On the Edit menu, click Find, and then enter the search text in the Find

What box.3. . . To find additional instances of the same text, continue to click Find Next.

Searching for and Replacing Text1. . . In the document, click where you want to start replacing text.2. . . On the Edit menu, click Replace, and then enter the text you want to find

and the text you want to replace it with.3. . . To replace all instances of the text, click Replace All.

To replace each instance of the text individually, click Find Next, and then click Replace.

Inserting the Current Date and Time1. . . Click where you want the date and time to appear.2. . . On the Insert menu, click Date and Time.3. . . Click the format you want for the date or the time.

8-5Working with Text

Page 348: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Formatting Text

Changing How Text Wraps on Your Screen1. . . On the View menu, click Options.2. . . Click the tab for the file type you are working with.3. . . In the Word Wrap area, click the wrapping option you want.

NoteThe wrapping options only affect how text appears on your screen. When printed, the document uses the margin settings specified in Page Setup.

Creating a Bullet List1. . . Click where you want the bullet list to start.2. . . On the Format menu, click Bullet Style, and then enter text.

When you press enter, another bullet is displayed on the next line.

3. . . To end the bullet list, click Bullet Style again.

Changing a Font Type, Style, or Size1. . . Select the text you want to format.2. . . On the Format menu, click Font.3. . . Click the options you want.

NoteYou can specify the font for new text by changing the font settings before you begin to type. To change the font for an entire document, click the Edit menu, and then click Select All before clicking the Format menu.

Formatting a Paragraph1. . . Click within the paragraph you want to format.2. . . On the Format menu, click Paragraph, and then choose the alignment and

indents you want.

8-6 Previewer

Page 349: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteTo define paragraph formatting for a new document, change the format setting before you begin to type.

Setting Tab Stops1. . . Click within the paragraph you want to format.2. . . On the Format menu, click Tabs.3. . . To set a tab stop, enter the position in the Tab Stop Position box, and then

click Set.To delete a tab stop, click it in the tab-stop list, and then click Clear.

To delete all tab stops in the selected paragraph, click Clear All.

8-7Formatting Text

Page 350: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Printing

Printing a DocumentIf the document is open, click the File menu, and then click Print.

If the document is not open, drag the document from My Computer or Windows Explorer to your printer in the Printers folder.

NoteWhile a document is printing, a printer icon appears next to the clock on the taskbar. When this icon disappears, your document has fin-ished printing. For easy access to your printer, you can create a shortcut to it on your desktop.

Seeing a Page Before You Print ItOn the File menu, click Print Preview.

NoteTo return to the previous view from Print Preview, click the Close Button.

Setting Page MarginsOn the File menu, click Page Setup, and then enter new values in the Margins area.

Changing Printers and Printing Options1. . . On the File menu, click Page Setup.2. . . To change paper size, page orientation, or margins, change settings here.

To change printers, click Printer, and then click a printer from the Name list.

8-8 Previewer

Page 351: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Creating Connections with Other Documents

Embedding or Linking an Object into PreviewerAn object is text, graphics, or other information created and edited in a program other than Previewer. You can insert and store objects in a Previewer document.

When information is linked, the new document is updated automatically if the information in the original document changes.

When information is embedded, the new document is not linked to the original. If you change information in the original document, it is not updated in the new doc-ument.

1. . . On the Insert menu, click Object.2. . . To create a new object, click Create New, and then click an object type. When

you finish creating an object, click outside the object to return to Previewer.To insert an existing object, click Create From File, and then type the path and filename, or click Browse to find the file. Click Link to create a Link. To embed the object, leave the Link box unchecked.

Editing Embedded or Linked Objects1. . . Double-click the embedded or linked information. The toolbars and menus

from the program used to create the information appear.2. . . Edit the object.

Copying Information Between Documents1. . . In the document that contains the information you want to copy, select the

information by highlighting it.2. . . On the Edit menu, click Copy.3. . . In the document where you want the information to appear, click the place

where you want to put the information.4. . . On the Edit menu, click Paste. The information appears in its new location.

8-9Creating Connections with Other Documents

Page 352: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Moving Information Between Documents1. . . In the document that contains the information you want to move, select the

information by highlighting it. 2. . . On the Edit menu, click Cut.3. . . In the document where you want the information to appear, click the place

where you want to put the information.4. . . On the Edit menu, click Paste. The Information is removed from the

original document and appears in its new location.

8-10 Previewer

Page 353: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Appendix A

DBZIP / AUTOZIP1

DBZIP is a utility designed to allow convenient archiving and restoring of RBM databases along with all of their supporting files. An AMS Machinery Manager data-base file (Dbname.RBM) requires a number of global support files. Depending on which mode you are operating in, these support files may or may not be shared by other databases on your system. DBZIP allows users to make backups of their data-bases (including all support files) in case of a catastrophic system failure.

DBZIP is especially useful for AMS Machinery Manager users who function as con-sultants, maintaining multiple databases for multiple customers on a single system. DBZIP provides these users with an easy way to take an individual Machinery Health database file and archive it along with all of its various supporting files into a single, compact ZIP file. This file can be transferred to other AMS Machinery Manager systems where the DBZIP utility can be used to restore it. After restoration, the database will function as it did on the original system.

AUTOZIP is a utility that permits users to archive Machinery Health databases through a command line interface. AUTOZIP permits experienced users to set up automatic database archival scripts using standard Windows techniques.

AUTOZIP and DBzip do not support compression (zipping) of transient archive files.

A-1

Page 354: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Using DBZIP

DBZIP operates slightly differently depending on which mode you are operating in. For the typical user who uses AMS Machinery Manager in a single plant environ-ment, DBZIP is designed simply to make an archived backup file of a database with its supporting global files. In the regular user mode, you would only need to restore this database in the event of severe damage to your system.

For the more advanced user who is operating in Power User Mode, DBZIP oper-ates slightly differently. In Power User Mode, more options become available to provide complete control of the archival process. For more information on Power User, see Chapter 3 of the AMS Machinery Manager Installation manual.

Warning!Before using DBZIP, make sure you are completely familiar with how it manipulates the various files associated with your database. Improper use of DBZIP could result in permanent damage to or loss of your data.

A-2 -

Page 355: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Regular User

Archiving a Database1.Open the DBZIP utility by double clicking on its icon in the AMS Machinery

Manager main menu.

2

2. On the DBZIP main window, click on the Create Archive button on the toolbar, or choose Create Archive from the File menu.

3

s 4

3.On the Database Selection screen, choose the database from the list that you want to archive. If the desired database is not on the list, you can add it by clicking on the Add Database button.

A-3Using DBZIP

Page 356: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

5

4.The next screen prompts you for the name of the archived database and the location in which you want it to be stored. Click on the Save button to begin archiving your database.

6

A-4 -

Page 357: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteAlthough the default storage location is the user directory located under the Users folder in the RBMsuite directory, Emerson strongly recommends that you move the file to an external drive or other backup device for long-term storage.

5.DBZIP will begin searching for all files associated with the database. A progress bar will appear to show you what files are being compressed and the percentage of the archival that has been completed.

7

6.When the process is complete, the screen will show the end of list of archived files along with a message indicating that the archive was successfully completed.

8

A-5Using DBZIP

Page 358: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

DBZIP will create two files and place them in the location you specified in step 4. The .ZIP file contains the database archived with all its supporting global files. The .LOG file is a text file that contains a list of all the file names along with their paths that DBZIP archived into the .ZIP file. The .LOG file is for your reference should you need more specific information about the files compressed in the archive.

9

A-6 -

Page 359: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Restoring an Archived Database1.On the DBZIP main window, click on the Restore Archive button on the

toolbar, or select Restore Archive from the File menu.

10

2.The Select Database To Restore screen will appear, allowing you to select the database (Dbname.ZIP) file that you want to restore. Highlight the database you want to restore and click on the Open button.

11

3.The next screen allows you to select the location where you want to restore the archived database. The default location will be c:\RBMsuite\custdata\.

12

4.DBZIP will restore your database along with all its support files in their

A-7Using DBZIP

Page 360: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

appropriate locations.

NoteIf any of the files in the archived database already exist in the target location, DBZIP will not attempt to complete the restoration.

NoteEmerson strongly recommends that you run the DBFIX utility on all restored database archives.

A-8 -

Page 361: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Power User

NoteTo learn how to activate Power User, refer to Chapter 3 in the AMS Machinery Manager Installation manual.

A-9Using DBZIP

Page 362: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Archiving a Database1.Open the DBZIP utility by double clicking on its icon in the AMS Machinery

Manager main menu.

13

2.On the DBZIP main window, click on the Create Archive button on the toolbar, or select Create Archive from the File menu.

14

3.On the Database Selection screen, choose the database from the list that you want to archive. If the desired database is not on the list, you can add it by clicking on the Add Database button.

15

A-10 -

Page 363: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

4.The next screen allows you to set options for archive creation.

16

Validate AMS Machinery Manager databases prior to archive creationCheck this box to have DBZip make sure that your RBM database has no serious errors before archiving it. Emerson strongly recommends that you leave this box checked for all normal archive operations.

Duplicate AMS Machinery Manager databases prior to achieve creationCheck this box to have DBZip make a “working copy” of your RBM database to archive. This option is necessary to allow you to archive active online databases.

Remaining OptionsThe remaining options allow you to choose which files you wish to include in the archive. click in the check box next to each file you wish to include. Once your selections are made, click the OK button.

A-11Using DBZIP

Page 364: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

5.The next screen prompts you for the name of the archived database and the location in which you want it to be stored. Click on the Save button to begin archiving your database.

\ 17

6.The program will scan for all the files associates with the database. The next screen informs you that the scan is complete. Click on the Yes button to continue.

18

7.DBZIP will now compress the database file with all its support files into a single ZIP file. A progress bar will appear to indicate the progress of the archival.

19

A-12 -

Page 365: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

When the process is complete, the following screen will be displayed.

20

DBZIP will create two files and place them in the location you specified in step 4. The .ZIP file contains the database archived with all its supporting global files. The .LOG file is a text file that contains a list of all the file names along with their paths that DBZIP archived into the .ZIP file. The .LOG file is simply for your reference should you need more specific information about the files compressed in the archive.

21

A-13Using DBZIP

Page 366: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Restoring an Archive1.On the DBZIP main window, click on the Restore Archive button on the

toolbar, or select Restore Archive from the File menu.

22

2.The next screen will ask you which archived database file (Dbname.ZIP) you want to resore. Highlight the file and click on Open.

23

3.Now select the location where you want the restored database file to reside and click on the OK button.

A-14 -

Page 367: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

24

DBZIP will now begin restoring your database.

4.If DBZIP finds existing files with the same name in the restore location, the following screen will appear. This screen gives you the option to overwrite the existing files.

25

A-15Using DBZIP

Page 368: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

NoteIf you are not absolutely certain that you wish to overwrite pre-existing files in the target location, the “Back up overwritten files” option allows you to preserve the original files. You can then recover these files manually if necessary.

5. If you selected “Back up overwritten files”, DBZIP will first backup the files that are being overwritten, then the archived database will be restored in the location you specified in step 3 and the following screen will be displayed.

26

NoteEmerson strongly recommends that you run the DBFIX utility on all restored database archives.

A-16 -

Page 369: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Using AutoZip

AutoZip is a command line-based utility that provides access to most of the features of DBZip. AutoZip was developed specifically to permit experienced Windows system administrators to develop scripts that perform automatic archival of RBM databases and all their associated files.

Creating Archives from the command line using AutoZip

AutoZip is executed from a Windows command prompt or by a script or batch file. As with other command line utilities, AutoZip will describe its command syntax when you enter the command:

autozip /?

Then press the Return (Enter) button.

The supported syntax is described below.

AutoZip archives RBM databases and all of their associated files. Its commands take three forms:

A-17Using AutoZip

Page 370: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

AUTOZIP source [archive [log]] [/D] [/-D] [/O] [/-O] [/S] [/-S] [/V] [/-V]

source database to archive. (A .RBM extension is added if no extension is specified.)

archive Name (or full path) for archive. (A .ZIP extension is added if not specified.) If no archive name is specified, the database name is used.

log Name (or full path) for log file. (A .LOG extension is added if no extension is specified.) If no log file is name specified, the database name is used.

/D Duplicate database prior to archive creation. (Required for active online databases.)

/-D Do not duplicate database prior to archive creation.

/O Overwrite any pre-existing archivefile with the current archive. (Not recommended with the /-V switch unless the /S switch is also set.)

/-O Do not overwrite a pre-existing archive with the current archive.

/S Append a date/time stamp to archive and log file names.

/-S Do not append a date/time stamp to archive and log file names.

/V Validate the source database before producing archive.

/-V Do not validate the source database before archival. (Not recommended with the /O switch unless the /S switch is also set.)

A-18 -

Page 371: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

AUTOZIP [@file] [/A=a_path] [/L=l_path] [/I=i_path] [/D] [/-D] [/O] [/-O] [/S] [/-S] [/V] [/-V]

The remaining switches have the same meaning as they did above. However, when used with this command form, they specify the default settings to be used for all sub-sequent archives.

When installed, the default AutoZip settings are /D /O /-S /V. No default paths are initially defined.

If zipping from a data locker the command MUST have the form:

AUTOZIP server;data locker;database [switches]

If the command does not have this form it will fail.

If you are zipping from multiple database servers but do NOT have multiple data lockers, data locker may be omitted. The default will be to zip from the public data locker of the specified server.

While the command syntax for AutoZip looks complicated, its use is actually quite straightforward. Some examples should help.

The second form of the AutoZip command allows you to set up the program so you don’t have to enter complete paths for the file specifications needed to perform a backup. Thus, if you always want to save your

archives on the “zips” share of a computer named “Backup,” you simply issue the command:

file Name (or full path) of a file containing AutoZip commands of the form above. (Each command must be on a separate line, followed by a carriage return.)

/A=a_path Sets the default path for all archive files. “a_path” must specify a complete path of an existing directory.

/L=l_path Sets the default path for all log files. “l_path” must specify a complete path of an existing directory.

/I=i_path Sets the default path for all command input files. “i_path” must specify a complete path of an existing directory.

/P Display an informational popup window during archive creation.

/-P Do not display the popup window during archive creation.

A-19Using AutoZip

Page 372: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

autozip/a=\\Backup\zips

Similarly if you want the log file for each archive to be stored in the “logs” folder of your local “D” disk drive. use the command:

autozip/l=D:\logs

Once these commands have been issued, AutoZip remembers your settings for all subsequent operations.

Then, to archive the AMS Machinery Manager database named “example.RBM,” use the fist form of AutoZip’s commands:

autozip example

Assuming you had entered the previous setup steps (and only those) this com-mand will produce an archive named

\\Backup\zips\example.zip

and a log file named

D:\logs\example–zip.log

The “@” form allows you to enter a file containing many “first form” AutoZip com-mands to be executed in order. (The “/i=” switch of the “second form” command tells AutoZip where to look for these command files.)

Using this method a command file containing:

exampleonline /Dstatic

would produce archives of three AMS Machinery Manager databases: example.RBM, online.RBM, and static.RBM.

NoteFor this example, online.RBM is assumed to be an online database that is actively collecting data. The “/D” switch causes it to be dupli-cated so that an archive can be created.

The remaining AutoZip switches offer options to tailor your archival operations to best suit the needs of your installation.

A-20 -

Page 373: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Glossary

AccelerationA measure of the rate of change of velocity of an object, usually measured in g’s (1 g represents the acceleration due to gravity). The sensor used to measure accelera-tion is the accelerometer.

AcousticsThe study of the characteristics of sound.

AlarmAn indication that the vibration or other parameters of a machine have changed in a significant manner.

Alarm LimitsAmplitude levels which define an alarm condition on the machine being moni-tored.

AlertAn alarm limit calculated by the software which indicates that amachine is approaching failure. Designated as a “C” alarm in reports.

AliasingAn effect that results in erroneous frequency spectra when the frequency of the signal being sampled is more than 0.5 times the sampling rate. CSI analyzers include anti-aliasing filters that eliminate these errors.

AmplificationIncreasing signal amplitude by a desired amount in order to facilitate further pro-cessing of the signal.

AmplitudeIndicates the strength (magnitude in RMS, peak, peak-to-peak, average, or D.C.) of a measured signal.

G-1

Page 374: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Analog IntegrationA method for converting a signal proportional to acceleration to the equivalent velocity signal, or converting a signal proportional to velocity to the equivalent dis-placement signal. Analog integration is superior to the equivalent digital method because it produces a better estimate of low-frequency components in the vibration spectrum, and improves dynamic range.

Analysis Parameters Divides the frequency spectrum into bands that are individually measured and ana-lyzed.

Analysis Parameter SetIncludes individual analysis parameters, and also contains instructions that tell the machinery analyzer how to acquire data.

AreaA grouping of Equipment within a company or plant for the purpose of predictive maintenance; may include the entire facility or a logical division thereof; can then be subdivided into routes of machines for data collection.

AutorangeThe process of automatically adjusting the input instrumentation amplifier of the analyzer to match the amplitude of the vibration signal. This process results in increased dynamic range.

AveragingA method of collecting data in which the mean levels over a number of spectral measurements minimize the influence of random noise fluctuations.

A-WeightingA frequency shaping method that can be applied to a spectrum based upon the fre-quency response of the human ear. The resulting spectrum represents the loud-ness of the various levels as they would appear to the human ear.

Bandwidth The analysis frequency range, from lowest to highest, over which data will be col-lected. Bandwidth is specified with a minimum and maximum frequency.

G-2

Page 375: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

BaselineA reference spectrum, usually the first spectrum collected on a measurement point.

Baud RateUnit of speed for data transmission over a serial communications link.

Block Database size is specified in blocks. One block = 0.5 Kilobytes.

BPFI For rolling element bearings, the ball pass frequency (inner), a defect in the inner race of a bearing.

BPFOFor rolling element bearings, the ball pass frequency (outer), a defect in the outer race of a bearing.

BSFBearing spin frequency for rolling element bearings.

Calibration The procedure by which instruments and transducers are checked and adjusted in order to obtain accurate readings.

CPMThe unit of frequency in cycles per minute. Equal to Hz x 60.

Crest FactorThe ratio of peak to RMS levels of a signal. A single-frequency signal has a crest factor of 1.414; random noise has a crest factor of approximately 3; signals with impulsive content have higher crest factor values. The crest factor can be used to check for impacting, such as caused by rolling bearing defects.

Cursor A manually controlled marker that can be moved across a spectrum or waveform plot display indicating time or frequency and amplitude at the cursor location.

G-3

Page 376: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Data Units The units that are used to display the measured data. The analyzer can display data in the sensor’s units (no conversion), or vibration sensor units can be converted to acceleration, velocity, or displacement.

dB (decibels) a relative, logarithmic unit which can be used when measuring signal amplitude, defined as follows:

27

Where X is the quantity being measured, and Xref is a standard reference value of that quantity

Diagnostics The techniques by which machine problems are identified and analyzed.

Digital IntegrationA method of converting acceleration to velocity or velocity to displacement by first collecting the spectral data and then digitally converting the spectra at each fre-quency.

Displacement Refers to the distance that an object moves, usually considered to be the overall range of movement; measured in mils or microns. Displacement is often measured from eddy current probes and represents the physical movement of a rotating shaft relative to its supporting bearing.

Sometimes accelerometers or velocity probes are used, and the data is integrated into displacement. In this case, movement represents the displacement of the machine casing where the probe is mounted.

DriversSystem software that enables the operation of the AMS Machinery Manager pro-gram modules. A diskette containing the drivers is provided with all CSI software.

G-4

Page 377: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Envelope WindowsUsed in envelope detection to divide a spectrum into multiple bands to establish alarm levels.

FFT Fast Fourier Transform; an efficient computational process which allows the con-version of a signal’s time waveform into a frequency spectrum.

Fault An alarm level which indicates that a machine or component has failed. Desig-nated as a “D” alarm in reports.

Fault Frequency Set A set of pre-defined frequencies where mechanical faults are expected to occur.

FilterA device which removes certain frequencies from a signal while preserving the rest of the signal.

Firmware A term referring to the internal software that controls or instructs the functions of the analyzer.

Flux CoilThe CSI Flux Coil is a device which attaches to electric motors to capture flux sig-nals. This provides an electrical “quality” signature which is sensitive to conditions that alter the electrical characteristics of the motor (broken rotor bars, eccentricity, imbalance between phases, and stator faults).

Flux SpectraMotor flux spectra are acquired with CSI’s Flux Coil. The “low frequency” spec-trum is a high resolution spectrum with a maximum frequency of at least three times running speed, or two times line frequency (whichever is greater). Analysis of this spectrum provides information on the rotor condition, changes in voltage bal-ance and some stator fault detection. The “high frequency” spectrum contains slot pass family frequencies which provide indication of stator related faults.

G-5

Page 378: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Frequency Number of times an event repeats in a unit of time; usually expressed in hertz (Hz) or cycles per minute (CPM).

Fundamental Frequency The frequency of the peak from which related harmonics are referenced. 1xRPM is an example of a fundamental frequency.

g’s The unit of measure for acceleration; 1 g is defined as the acceleration due to gravity at sea level.

Gear Mesh Frequency Asynchronous vibration frequency associated with each pair of meshing gears. Cal-culated as RPM divided by 60 times the number of teeth on a particular gear.

GlobalA change or changes made to the entire database.

Hanning Type of window applied to waveform data before frequency analysis; used to pre-vent peaks in a frequency spectrum from spreading out due to a phenomenon called leakage. The Hanning window is recommended for most frequency analysis measurements where the signal is steady-state.

HarmonicAn integer multiple of a fundamental frequency f0 (example 2f0, 3f0, 4f0, etc.).

Harmonic MarkerA box marker that appears on a spectrum display to indicate the harmonic peaks of a fundamental peak.

Hertz (Hz)The unit of frequency in cycles per second.

HFDHigh-frequency detection; the amplitude of vibration in g’s over a broad frequency band from 5 kHz up to 20 kHz or greater.

G-6

Page 379: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

ICMInfluence Coefficient Method; the method used by the CSI’s Balancing programs to calculate balancing solutions.

LinesThe number of lines of resolution used for the spectrum calculation. Resolution (in Hz) equals maximum frequency divided by the number of Lines.

Local DataData taken in the off-route mode of the machinery analyzer.

Measurement PointAny location or point on a machine where measurements are made.

Micron(s)A metric unit of measurement (one millionth of a meter).

Mil(s)A unit of measure for displacement (one thousandth of an inch).

ModemA device that enables remote communications between the host computer and a machinery analyzer over telephone lines.

ModulationInstantaneous variations in a signal’s characteristics. May be amplitude (AM) or fre-quency (FM) modulation.

Multiplane BalancingA method of balancing a machine that allows the measurement of the imbalance weights at several planes along the shaft of the machine. Correction weights are then added in each of these planes. Multiplane Balancing, as opposed to single plane balancing, is usually required when a machine has several rotating elements, such as flywheels, tightly coupled on a shaft and closely spaced.

NotesSpecific observations that can be stored on the measurement point of a machine along with the collected data.

G-7

Page 380: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

These observations can be predefined notes from the AMS Machinery Manager database, user defined notes that have been created via the keypad on the machinery analyzer, or a combination of the two methods.

1/3 Octave Method of measuring a signal by measuring the signal levels within a set of band-pass filters that have a bandwidth of 1/3 octave.

Off-RouteA mode that allows the collection and storage of data on measurement points that are not defined in the downloaded route.

OrdersMultiples of machine turning speed (1xRPM, 2xRPM, 3xRPM, etc.).

PeakThe largest signal level seen in a waveform over a period of time. For sinusoidal sig-nals, the peak signal level is always 1.414 times the RMS value of the signal level. For non-sinusoidal signals, the peak level is often larger than the result that this formula would produce.

Peak-to-Peak The difference between the maximum and minimum signal levels over a period of time. For a pure sinusoidal signal, the peak-to-peak level is two times the peak signal level and 2.828 times the RMS value of the signal level. For non-sinusoidal signals, the peak-to-peak level is often larger than the result this formula would produce.

PeriodTime required to complete one cycle in a periodic signal.

Phase 1xRPM phase represents the location of the shaft of a machine in degrees (0 - 360) with respect to the tachometer pulse where the largest vibration occurs.

Plane Designates one or more of the rotating elements of a machine that is to be bal-anced. Each plane lies perpendicular to the line that defines the axis of rotation.

G-8

Page 381: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Point Any location on a machine where measurements are made; used interchangeably with measurement point.

Polar PlotA type of graph that displays data in polar coordinates.

Predictive MaintenanceTechnology of periodically monitoring the actual condition of machines to dis-cover faults, to determine probable time of breakdown, and to provide scheduled downtime for repair that avoids excess cost and lost production.

Principal Slot PassPrincipal slot pass (PSP) equals the number of rotor bars (or stator slots) times run-ning speed, minus line frequency ((#RBxSPEED)-LF)

Real-TimeContinuously updated data or plot, such as an FFT spectrum.

RMSThe magnitude of a signal calculated or measured by the root mean square method. Equal to 0.707 times the peak value for a pure sinusoidal signal.

RouteOne or more machines and their respective measurement points organized in an efficient sequence for data collection.

RPMRepresents rotations per minute and is equal to 60 times frequency in Hz. Equiva-lent to CPM (cycles per minute).

RS232 A serial, synchronous communication standard; a type designation for cables that are used to connect communications ports on host computer, analyzer, and tele-phone modems.

G-9

Page 382: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Shaft Current/VoltageVariations in electric motor air gaps, windings, and metal (rotor and frame) result in a fluctuating magnetic field which is cut by conducting material, in this case, the motor shaft. This condition gives rise to a current loop consisting of the shaft, bear-ings, and casing which can damage the motor shaft and bearings.

Shaft ProbeThis CSI device is used to acquire shaft current/voltage measurements on electric motors.

Slip SidebandDuring each turn of an AC motor’s rotor, electrical signals associated with the rotor induce currents in the stator windings. These currents appear as “slip” sidebands to the supply line frequency peak. This frequency spectrum reflects the influence of the motor’s load and response on the supply current. The sidebands are the result of the slip frequency multiplied by the number of poles, and are referred to as “NPxSF”.

The frequency of the lower sideband is determined by:

28

SubharmonicsVibration frequencies which are integer fractions of the running speed (example 1/2 RPM, 1/3 RPM, etc.) or some other fundamental frequency.

TachometerPulse signal used to measure shaft turning speed. This may also be used to synchro-nize the acquisition of dynamic data.

TransientA non-steady-state signal of finite duration; often refers to a startup or coastdown of a machine.

TrendPlotting a number of measurements of a parameter over time.

G-10

Page 383: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

TriggerCauses the analyzer to start collection of data upon the receipt of a specified dynamic signal from a sensor.

Uniform Window Description of a uniformly weighted signal, where no special window shaping is applied before frequency analysis. Sometimes used for collection of non-steady-state data.

VelocityA measurement of the time rate of change in the displacement of an object. Vibra-tion is often measured in velocity using a velocity sensor. Velocity can be measured also by integrating an accelerometer signal.

Vibration Parameters Twelve frequency band-limited parameters which are measured from the vibration-signal. These parameters are defined in the analysis parameter set and are loaded-into the machinery analyzer for each point from the database. (Alsocalled individual analysis parameters.)

ViscosityResistance of fluids to shearing effects; usually decreasing for liquids as the temper-ature rises.

WaveformAnalog or digital representation of a signal or function displayed as amplitude vs. time.

WindowSee Hanning Window and Uniform Window.

G-11

Page 384: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

G-12

Page 385: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

Index

Aalarm

absolute delta 2-8absolute value 2-8alert level 3-67baseline override 2-8codes 2-14data values 3-37, 3-142dual lower delta 2-12dual lower level 2-11dual upper delta 2-11dual upper level 2-9dual window delta 2-13early warning 2-7, 3-68fault 3-67in-window 2-10levels 2-6limit set 3-38limits 2-6 to 2-15, 3-64 to 3-68, 3-87 to 3-88,

3-124 to 3-127out-of-window 2-10units 3-66weak side value 3-67

Alarm Details… 2-21Alarm Display Options… 2-24Alarm Status 2-16alarm status

Color Scheme Tables 2-17Alarm Tree Filters… 2-25AMS Machinery Manager 1-12

Database 1-12database 1-21

analysis parameter

individual 3-59 to 3-62type 3-120units 3-123

analysis parameter set 2-4 to 2-5, 3-37description 3-50, 3-119information 3-49 to 3-58, 3-117 to 3-123,

3-138, 3-144low frequency signal limit 3-50lower frequency 3-51

analysis parametersindividual 3-53

append 6-1area

duplication 5-13Area Summary Options 3-28averages

number of 3-52spectral mode 3-52

A-Weighting 3-53

Bbaseline 3-68baseline override 2-8branch, adding 3-42

Ccalculate new statistics 4-35clear all statistics 4-35clear ave/sigma 4-35clear baseline

area 4-32database

area ID filter 4-30

Index-1

Page 386: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

measurement point ID filter 4-31equipment 4-34

COMPIL 1-12CSIview

description 8-1setting up 8-3

Ddata

changing label 4-40changing label (area) 4-41changing label (equipment) 4-41changing label (meas point) 4-42label options 4-39modify statistics 4-27

data management options 4-2data options 5-15data statistics

baseline and statistical values 4-27baseline data set 4-28calculate new statistics 4-29clear all statistics 4-28clear ave/sigm 4-28manual edit 4-29manual editing 4-38set baseline = average 4-28

data unitsEnglish 3-84metric 3-84

database 3-16accessing more than once 2-33components 2-3create oil ref 3-15create RBM 3-15entering password 2-33global information 3-83, 3-127, 3-135, 3-138,

3-144name 2-30, 3-3

database deletion 4-16database information

copy vs. move 5-8copy/move example 5-22 to 5-23copying 5-9duplicating 5-4moving 5-10transfer source and target 5-19 to 5-21

database windowof Copy/Move task 5-8of Modify Equipment task 5-25of Modify Measurement Points task 5-33

DBASE main menu 3-1, 3-20DBUtly

Copy/Move 5-8 to 5-23Modify Equipment 5-25 to 5-32Modify Measurement Points 5-33 to 5-45preferences 5-4reports 5-5 to 5-7tasks 5-2toolbar 5-2 to 5-3

DC offset 3-40DEFINE Multiple Route Load 7-25delete 6-1delete area 4-19delete database 4-16

range of gross scan data to delete 4-18range of spectral data to delete 4-18range of trend data to delete 4-18range of waveform data to delete 4-18

delete equipment 4-21Detailed Equipment List 3-28document type

RTF 8-2text only 8-2Word 6 8-2

drill down 1-12

Index-2

Page 387: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

EEntire Database Summary Options 3-28equipment

duplication 5-13modifying 5-25 to 5-32modifying example 5-30 to 5-32

events 1-12EXPORT 1-21external file options 5-18

Ffault frequencies 2-27, 3-37, 3-70 to 3-80, 3-89 to

3-97, 3-127bearing 3-90belt 3-95displaying dialog box 3-42first modifier 3-79fixed 3-94gearmesh 3-91harmonic 3-93modulated 3-93multiplied 3-89second modifier 3-80type 3-72

fault frequency, clearing setup 3-37faults

rotor G-5stator G-5

filter/actions windowof Modify Equipment task 5-26of Modify Measurement Points task 5-34

FPM to RPM 3-32frequency

lower sideband G-10frequency band 2-4frequency resolution 3-52

Hhanning window 3-53hardware requirement 1-13HFB 3-61HFD full scale range 3-41

IIndeterminate Alarm Status 2-19insert 6-1Installation Date

3-141

JJob Data

show job data on tree 4-4

Kkeywords 3-85

Llines 3-52load units 3-85

Mmachine 2-2

load type 3-32speed type 3-32

magnitude 1-12main menu, DBASE 3-1manual data

enter 6-1Manufacturer

3-141measurement auto-range 3-41measurement point

ID 3-35, 3-102, 3-131, 3-140orientation 3-35, 3-102, 3-131, 3-140

Index-3

Page 388: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

measurement points 2-2duplicate 5-14modifying 5-33 to 5-45modifying example 5-42 to 5-45

menu options, pulldown 3-2MIMOSA 1-12Model Number

3-141monitoring schedule 3-37, 3-132, 3-142motor monitoring

flux G-5

NNo Equipment List 3-28notepad 3-82, 3-127, 3-134, 3-138, 3-144NPxSF

definition G-10Nspectr 1-21

Ooil equipment

# fans 3-109# radiators 3-109criticality 3-104cycles 3-108high voltage 3-108impedance 3-108KVA 3-108low voltage 3-108phases 3-108

Online 7-8options

data 5-15 to 5-16external file 5-18 to 5-19set 5-17structure 5-11 to 5-14

orders 3-61

Pparameter units 3-60password

database 2-33Pipe Diameter 3-141plotting full scale range 3-41pre-process 3-55Previewer

description 8-1setting up 8-3

principle slot pass G-5printing

areaequipment ID filter 4-8, 4-12extent of spectra to print 4-9extent of trend to print 4-9extent of waveform to print 4-9measurement point ID filter 4-8

database 4-5area ID filter 4-5, 4-8, 4-30equipment ID filter 4-5extent of trend to print 4-7extent of waveform to print 4-7measurement point ID filter 4-6

equipmentextent of gross scan to print 4-14extent of spectra to print 4-14extent of trend to print 4-14extent of waveform to print 4-14measurement point ID filter 4-12

measurement pointavailable data 4-15extent of gross scan to print 4-16extent of spectra to print 4-16extent of trend to print 4-16extent of waveform to print 4-16

Previewer document 8-8route summary 7-23

program description 1-8 to 1-10pulldown menu options 3-2

Index-4

Page 389: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

RRBM 1-12RBM Database Management Functions 3-27RBMview

database 1-21reference load 3-33Reference Pressure 3-141reference RPM 3-33Refresh Alarm Severities 2-24Reliability Based Maintenance 1-12REPORT 1-12report

measurement exception analysis 2-6reports

DBUtly 5-5 to 5-7revise 6-1Rich Text Format 8-2Route

Management Program 1-9, 7-1route 7-1 to 7-24

add machine 7-15affect on database 7-2all data stored 7-7analyzer memory 7-3auto build 7-10collection schedule 7-6copying 7-5create 7-4 to 7-11creator 7-5delete equipment 7-15description 7-5display order 7-24entire station 7-5grouping machinery 7-1high status data 7-7ignore change 7-9, 7-16, 7-22machine sequence 7-16machinery analyzer 1-9, 7-1no data stored 7-7

oil points 7-8pick-points 7-9purpose 7-5rename 7-12selecting machines 7-9set reference 7-6summary 7-23technologies 7-8thermographic points 7-8update 7-9, 7-16, 7-22

routesdata storage 7-18 to 7-21deleting 7-13 to 7-17editing 7-13 to 7-17limitations 7-3reorder 7-24

RTF 8-2

SSelect Group 3-3Selecting 4-35selecting a technology 3-21sensor

power 3-39sensitivity 3-39

set baseline = average 4-35set options 5-17Shortcut Bar 2-37Show Job Data 4-4sideband G-10signal group/channel numbers 3-40Simple Equipment List 3-28special time waveform 3-56spectrum

high frequency G-5low frequency G-5

Steam Trap Type 3-141

Index-5

Page 390: 97388 Rev.12 Machinery Health Manager

structure options 5-11

Ttachometer 3-33, 3-58technology selection 3-21text

file 8-2third-octave analysis 3-53toolbar options

about 3-19chg tchnlogy 3-18, 3-21create RBM database 3-15database 3-16function bar 3-16help 3-18listing function bar 3-16open database 2-30, 3-3output destination 3-6print setup 3-6set assignment sumry 3-17tree options 3-16

Tree Element Summary 3-26trend data 3-61, 4-27 to 4-29

UUltrasonic Data Manager 1-11uniform window 3-53units type code 3-36

Vvalid signal levels 3-41variable high frequency band 3-61

WWord 6 8-2word processor 8-1

Index-6